1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children no
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "default" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
71 \font_typewriter_osf false
72 \font_sf_scale 100 100
73 \font_tt_scale 100 100
75 \use_dash_ligatures false
77 \default_output_format default
79 \bibtex_command bibtex
80 \index_command makeindex
81 \float_placement class
82 \float_alignment class
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 1
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 1
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 1
110 \use_package stmaryrd 1
111 \use_package undertilde 1
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
123 \notefontcolor #0000ff
140 \paragraph_separation skip
143 \math_numbering_side default
144 \quotes_style english
148 \paperpagestyle default
150 \tracking_changes true
151 \output_changes false
153 \postpone_fragile_content false
157 \docbook_table_output 0
158 \author -1402925745 "Günter Milde"
159 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
160 \author -584632292 "Richard Kimberly Heck"
161 \author -563046850 "Jean-Marc LASGOUTTES"
162 \author -131811572 "Yuriy Skalko"
164 \author 5863344 "Enrico Forestieri"
165 \author 1675569489 "Stephan Witt"
176 by the \SpecialChar LyX
181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
183 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
184 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
185 Documentation mailing list:
186 \begin_inset CommandInset href
188 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
200 \begin_inset Newline newline
204 \begin_inset Newline newline
208 \begin_inset Note Note
211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
212 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
213 \begin_inset Newline newline
218 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
226 \begin_layout Standard
227 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
228 LatexCommand tableofcontents
235 \begin_layout Chapter
239 \begin_layout Section
240 What is \SpecialChar LyX
244 \begin_layout Standard
246 is a document preparation system.
247 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
248 scripts, publishable books, business
249 letters and proposals,
250 \change_deleted 5863208 1598113909
254 It is unlike most other
255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
259 \begin_inset Quotes erd
262 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
264 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
265 \begin_inset Quotes eld
269 \begin_inset Quotes erd
273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
277 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
280 pt type, left justified, 5
281 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
285 \begin_inset Quotes erd
290 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
294 \begin_layout Standard
295 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
300 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
304 \begin_layout Standard
309 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
310 's philosophy: most importantly,
311 the format of all of the manuals.
312 If you don't read it, you will have a difficult time navigating the manuals.
313 Additionally it provides a high level content description of the other
314 manuals giving the user an idea of where to look for specific information.
317 \begin_layout Section
322 \begin_layout Standard
323 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
324 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
326 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
327 There is of course a work area for editing documents complete with a vertical
331 \begin_layout Standard
332 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
333 This is not a bug or an oversight, it is intentional.
334 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
336 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
337 only a vertical scrollbar.
340 \begin_layout Standard
341 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
342 The first case is large images.
343 To avoid images being displayed larger than your screen, left click on
344 the image and use the option
355 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
358 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through both.
361 \begin_layout Standard
362 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
363 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
369 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
371 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
378 \begin_layout Section
382 \begin_layout Standard
383 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
385 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
387 Just select the manual you want to read from the
394 \begin_layout Section
395 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
397 \begin_inset CommandInset label
399 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
406 \begin_layout Standard
407 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
408 can be configured via the menu
410 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
414 \begin_inset Index idx
417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
424 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
426 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
427 packages are available.
428 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
430 Although this configuration was performed when \SpecialChar LyX
431 was installed on your system,
432 you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
433 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
437 \begin_inset space \space{}
440 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
441 classes, which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
443 To force \SpecialChar LyX
444 to re-inspect your system use
446 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
450 \begin_inset Index idx
453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
454 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
460 Then restart \SpecialChar LyX
461 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
464 \begin_layout Section
467 \begin_inset CommandInset label
469 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
476 \begin_layout Standard
477 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
478 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
479 installed but you will not be
481 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122369
482 or print your documents
486 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122520
487 Some \SpecialChar LyX
488 documents use DocBook instead of \SpecialChar LaTeX
490 \begin_inset Quotes eld
494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
497 which can produce PDFs and the like.
500 Even without \SpecialChar LaTeX
502 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122546
505 every \SpecialChar LyX
506 document can still be output as plain text
507 \change_inserted 5863208 1598122500
513 \begin_layout Standard
514 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
516 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122571
520 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
521 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
524 \begin_layout Standard
525 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
526 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
527 finds on your system are listed in a file you can view
530 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
538 If you are missing needed packages then you must install them and then
539 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
542 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
546 \begin_inset Index idx
549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
550 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
558 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
565 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
569 \begin_layout Chapter
570 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
574 \begin_layout Section
575 Basic File Operations
576 \begin_inset Index idx
579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
588 \begin_layout Standard
593 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations common to any word
594 processor as well as some more advanced operations:
597 \begin_layout Itemize
619 \begin_layout Itemize
635 arg "buffer-new-template"
641 \begin_layout Itemize
663 \begin_layout Itemize
671 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352530
675 \begin_layout Itemize
677 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352546
689 \begin_layout Itemize
701 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353355
705 \begin_layout Itemize
707 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353357
715 \begin_layout Itemize
737 \begin_layout Itemize
749 arg "buffer-write-as"
753 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352570
757 \begin_layout Itemize
759 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352997
775 \begin_layout Itemize
789 \begin_layout Itemize
803 \begin_layout Standard
804 They all do pretty much the same thing as other word processors, with a
805 few minor differences.
808 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
819 command lists the available templates.
820 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features
821 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353491
822 and possibly propose text fragments
824 for the document, features
825 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353500
828 you would otherwise need to
829 \change_deleted -712698321 1553353510
831 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353510
835 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353505
839 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
845 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
847 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
853 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353657
854 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a
858 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
866 \begin_layout Standard
867 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
899 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
900 to open a file or create a new one, that big
901 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174669
905 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174681
909 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174691
920 \begin_layout Standard
942 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174707
944 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174708
947 people work on the same document at the same time.
951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
952 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
955 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174722
960 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174782
961 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
963 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
965 \begin_inset Flex Emph
968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
970 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
971 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
980 \begin_inset Flex Emph
983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
985 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
993 help manual\SpecialChar endofsentence
1004 \begin_inset space ~
1008 \begin_inset space ~
1013 will reload the document from disk.
1014 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
1015 and want to restore it to the last save
1016 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174796
1023 \begin_inset space ~
1028 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
1029 them as your changes.
1032 \begin_layout Section
1033 Basic Editing Features
1034 \begin_inset Index idx
1037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1044 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1046 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
1053 \begin_layout Standard
1054 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
1055 can perform cut and paste operations
1056 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
1057 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
1058 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
1059 editing features and how to access
1061 We will start with cut and paste.
1064 \begin_layout Standard
1065 As you might expect, the
1069 menu and the standard toolbar have the cut and paste commands, along with
1070 various other editing features.
1071 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
1075 \begin_layout Itemize
1081 \begin_inset Index idx
1084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1113 \begin_layout Itemize
1119 \begin_inset Index idx
1122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1151 \begin_layout Itemize
1157 \begin_inset Index idx
1160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1185 \begin_layout Itemize
1189 \begin_inset space ~
1195 \begin_layout Itemize
1199 \begin_inset space ~
1205 \begin_layout Itemize
1209 \begin_inset space ~
1213 \begin_inset space ~
1219 \begin_inset Index idx
1222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1231 \begin_inset Index idx
1234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1249 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1259 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1265 \begin_layout Standard
1266 The first three are self-explanatory.
1267 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1268 and other programs using
1289 put two versions of text into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted)
1290 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1295 supports formatted and unformatted text as well as graphics.
1296 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1297 For example if the clipboard contains text in a Comma Separated Values
1298 (CSV) format and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1299 into individual cells.
1303 \begin_inset space ~
1308 shows you a list of the last several strings you have pasted.
1309 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1313 \begin_layout Standard
1317 \begin_inset space ~
1322 may also contain optional items for specific formats depending on the clipboard
1324 Possible formats include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1326 \begin_inset space ~
1333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1339 , PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1340 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1341 in different formats and you want to select one format explicitly.
1343 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1347 \begin_inset space \space{}
1350 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1351 text which is often meaningless.)
1354 \begin_layout Standard
1358 \begin_inset space ~
1361 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1363 \begin_inset space ~
1367 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1371 \begin_inset space ~
1380 with the only difference being that it acts on text only.
1381 It will paste the text in the clipboard such that the whole text selection
1382 is inserted as one paragraph.
1383 A new paragraph is only started where there is a blank line in the text.
1387 \begin_inset space ~
1392 line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph.
1393 This is useful when copying contents of tables from webpages to a table
1399 \begin_inset space ~
1402 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1404 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1408 \begin_inset space ~
1416 \begin_inset space ~
1419 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1422 paste from the primary selection.
1423 This is normally the currently selected text.
1426 \begin_layout Standard
1429 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1431 \begin_inset space ~
1435 \begin_inset space ~
1443 \begin_inset space ~
1447 \begin_inset space ~
1453 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1459 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1462 \begin_inset space ~
1471 \begin_inset space ~
1476 button to skip the curren
1477 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1481 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1488 \begin_inset space ~
1493 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1497 \begin_inset space ~
1502 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1504 If the toggle is set, searching for
1505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1516 will not match the word
1517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1531 Match whole words only
1533 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1534 to only find complete words, e.
1535 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1539 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126824
1543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1555 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1568 also offers an advanced
1571 \begin_inset space ~
1575 \begin_inset space ~
1580 feature that is described in section
1581 \begin_inset space ~
1585 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1587 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1594 \begin_layout Standard
1595 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1596 \begin_inset space \space{}
1600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1608 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1610 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1615 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1622 \begin_layout Standard
1626 arg "inset-select-all"
1629 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1630 When the cursor is inside an inset
1633 arg "inset-select-all"
1636 selects the content of the inset.
1640 arg "inset-select-all"
1643 consecutively will increase the selection scope to the whole inset and
1644 then to the whole document.
1648 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1651 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1655 \begin_layout Section
1657 \begin_inset Index idx
1660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1667 \begin_inset Index idx
1670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1677 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1679 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1686 \begin_layout Standard
1687 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1689 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1692 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1695 or the toolbar button
1702 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1704 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1707 or the toolbar button
1714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1718 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1721 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1722 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1725 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1728 \begin_layout Standard
1729 Note that if you undo all changes to arrive at the document as it was last
1731 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1738 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1739 This is a consequence of the 100
1740 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1743 step undo limit mentioned above.
1746 \begin_layout Standard
1755 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1757 However they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by
1761 \begin_layout Section
1763 \begin_inset Index idx
1766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1775 \begin_layout Standard
1776 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1779 \begin_layout Enumerate
1784 \begin_layout Itemize
1789 once anywhere in the edit window.
1790 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1794 \begin_layout Enumerate
1799 \begin_layout Itemize
1806 highlights the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1809 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1812 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1813 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1815 \change_inserted 5863208 1598175891
1816 You can also use the context menu triggered by right clicking on the selected
1822 \begin_layout Itemize
1823 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1826 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1833 \begin_layout Enumerate
1834 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1838 \begin_layout Standard
1839 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1840 Check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1844 \begin_layout Section
1846 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1848 name "sec:Navigating"
1853 \begin_inset Index idx
1856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1865 \begin_layout Standard
1867 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1870 \begin_layout Itemize
1875 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1876 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1879 \begin_layout Itemize
1880 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1882 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1884 \begin_inset space ~
1889 or by the toolbar button
1892 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1898 \begin_layout Itemize
1899 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1901 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1904 and use the same menu to return to them.
1905 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1908 \begin_layout Standard
1912 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1917 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1918 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1920 \begin_inset space ~
1925 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1926 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1927 to another document part to look for something and want to go back to your
1928 last editing position.
1931 \begin_layout Standard
1936 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1940 \begin_layout Subsection
1942 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1944 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1949 \begin_inset Index idx
1952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1953 Navigating ! Outline
1959 \begin_inset Index idx
1962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1971 \begin_layout Standard
1972 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window you can choose between
1973 several different lists including other TOC-like objects such as lists
1974 of tables and figures, footnotes, labels and cross-references (see section
1975 \begin_inset space ~
1979 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1981 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1985 ), notes, or citations (see section
1986 \begin_inset space ~
1990 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1992 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1997 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
2001 \begin_layout Standard
2002 In many cases right clicking on elements in the Outline opens a context
2003 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
2004 For example with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
2005 dialog and to modify the citation.
2008 \begin_layout Standard
2013 field at the top allows you to filter which entries appear in the outline.
2014 For example, if you are displaying the list of
2016 Labels and References
2018 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
2020 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2024 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2027 in the filter and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
2030 \begin_layout Standard
2031 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons that allow you to further
2032 control the display.
2037 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
2038 Otherwise the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the document.
2043 option keeps it in the current view state.
2044 Keeping means that when you have the subsections of sections
2045 \begin_inset space ~
2048 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
2049 \begin_inset space ~
2052 3, the subsections of sections
2053 \begin_inset space ~
2056 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
2061 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
2062 \begin_inset space ~
2066 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
2068 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2072 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2076 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
2079 \begin_layout Standard
2086 button refreshes the TOC (
2087 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2089 \change_inserted 5863208 1598176913
2093 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2095 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2099 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2103 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2107 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2111 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2113 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2117 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2119 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2123 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2125 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2129 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2133 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2135 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2139 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2143 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2147 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2151 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2155 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2159 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2163 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2167 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2169 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2173 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
2187 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
2188 For example, you can move section
2189 \begin_inset space ~
2193 \begin_inset space ~
2196 2.4 or after section
2197 \begin_inset space ~
2202 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2215 (or the corresponding key bindings
2223 ) you can change the level of sections.
2224 You can make section
2225 \begin_inset space ~
2229 \begin_inset space ~
2233 \begin_inset space ~
2239 \begin_layout Standard
2240 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
2241 section to copy, cut or delete it.
2244 \begin_layout Subsection
2245 Horizontal Scrolling
2246 \begin_inset Index idx
2249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2250 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
2258 \begin_layout Standard
2260 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because standard output page formats
2262 \begin_inset space ~
2265 A4 are not as wide as PC or laptop screens.
2266 Therefore you will have trouble with the output of your document if document
2267 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2271 \begin_layout Standard
2272 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2276 \begin_layout Itemize
2278 is used on a small tablet computer
2281 \begin_layout Itemize
2282 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2294 \begin_inset space ~
2307 \begin_layout Itemize
2308 Math constructs with long command names
2311 \begin_layout Standard
2312 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2313 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2315 As an example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2316 window so that table
2317 \begin_inset space ~
2321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2323 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2328 You will now see a dotted red line on the right and/or left side of the
2330 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2331 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2334 \begin_layout Standard
2335 \begin_inset Float table
2342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2343 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2346 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2348 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2352 Horizontal scrolling test.
2360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2362 \begin_inset Tabular
2363 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2364 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2365 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2366 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2367 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2409 \begin_layout Section
2410 Input/Word Completion
2411 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2413 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2418 \begin_inset Index idx
2421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2428 \begin_inset Index idx
2431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2462 \begin_layout Standard
2464 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2466 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2467 is used to propose completions.
2470 \begin_layout Standard
2471 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2474 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2479 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2486 \begin_inset space ~
2490 \begin_inset space ~
2495 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2499 \begin_inset space ~
2504 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2505 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2509 \begin_inset space ~
2515 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2516 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2517 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2518 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2521 \begin_layout Standard
2523 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2524 completions available.
2529 key to accept a proposed completion.
2530 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2531 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys
2532 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
2535 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2542 \begin_layout Standard
2543 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2544 ing options for text.
2546 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340017
2548 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340019
2550 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340019
2553 he special math option
2557 enables characters to be composed.
2559 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180192
2561 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180192
2565 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180208
2568 you want to insert the character
2569 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2573 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180217
2576 input the characters
2577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2589 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180228
2591 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180229
2595 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180234
2597 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180235
2602 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180245
2604 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180246
2607 his is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use of the
2610 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180267
2612 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180267
2615 supported character combinations can be found in the file
2620 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180288
2622 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180288
2626 's installation folder.
2628 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340086
2629 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2636 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340324
2641 after autocorrection has done its magic leaves the un-corrected sequence.
2642 In the example above,
2647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2655 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2679 \begin_layout Section
2681 \begin_inset Index idx
2684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2691 \begin_inset Index idx
2694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2723 \begin_inset Index idx
2726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2757 \begin_layout Standard
2758 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2772 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2775 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2779 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2780 \begin_inset space ~
2784 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2786 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2793 \begin_layout Standard
2797 \begin_inset space ~
2805 \begin_inset space ~
2826 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2830 \begin_layout Labeling
2831 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2835 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2836 LatexCommand nomenclature
2838 description "Tabulator key"
2845 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2847 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2848 \begin_inset space ~
2852 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2854 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2859 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2861 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2865 , especially section
2866 \begin_inset space ~
2870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2872 reference "subsec:Lists"
2878 If you are still confused, look in the
2883 \begin_inset Newline newline
2891 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2892 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2896 \begin_layout Labeling
2897 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2901 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2902 LatexCommand nomenclature
2904 description "Escape key"
2912 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2916 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2919 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2920 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2923 \begin_layout Labeling
2924 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2929 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2930 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2934 \begin_layout Standard
2935 There are three modifier keys:
2938 \begin_layout Labeling
2939 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2957 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2958 LatexCommand nomenclature
2960 description "Control key"
2965 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses depending
2966 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2970 \begin_layout Itemize
2979 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2982 \begin_layout Itemize
2991 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2994 \begin_layout Itemize
3003 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
3007 \begin_layout Labeling
3008 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3026 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3027 LatexCommand nomenclature
3029 description "Shift key"
3034 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
3035 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
3038 \begin_layout Labeling
3039 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3045 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3057 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3058 LatexCommand nomenclature
3060 description "Alt or Meta key"
3065 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
3066 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
3067 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
3073 \begin_inset Newline newline
3076 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
3078 menu accelerator keys
3081 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
3082 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
3086 \begin_layout Standard
3087 For example, the sequence
3088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3094 \begin_inset space ~
3098 \begin_inset space ~
3104 \begin_inset space ~
3112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3125 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3131 \begin_inset space ~
3137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3147 \begin_layout Standard
3152 manual lists all other things bound to the
3160 \begin_layout Standard
3161 You will learn more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use \SpecialChar LyX
3163 most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at the bottom
3165 's main window describing the name of the action you have just triggered
3166 and any existing key bindings for that action.
3168 menus also list the defined key bindings.
3169 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
3170 in this documentation so you should not have any problems understanding
3172 However notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
3173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3188 followed by a capital
3195 \begin_layout Chapter
3198 \begin_inset Index idx
3201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3211 \begin_layout Section
3213 \begin_inset Index idx
3216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3225 \begin_layout Subsection
3229 \begin_layout Standard
3230 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
3231 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
3232 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
3233 numbering schemes, and so on.
3234 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
3235 and format the title of your document differently.
3238 \begin_layout Standard
3243 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
3244 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
3245 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
3246 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
3247 picks one for you by default.
3248 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
3251 \begin_layout Subsection
3253 \begin_inset Index idx
3256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3263 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3265 name "sec:Document-Classes"
3272 \begin_layout Standard
3273 You can select a class using the
3275 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3276 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3280 \begin_inset Index idx
3283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3290 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
3294 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3298 \begin_layout Standard
3299 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
3304 \begin_layout Description
3305 Article for basic articles
3308 \begin_layout Description
3309 Report for basic reports
3312 \begin_layout Description
3313 Book for writing a book
3316 \begin_layout Description
3317 Letter for US-style letters
3320 \begin_layout Standard
3321 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
3322 only uses if you have installed
3323 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
3324 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
3325 distributions will include
3327 Here are some of the classes.
3328 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
3330 Special Document Classes
3339 \begin_layout Description
3340 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
3343 \begin_layout Description
3344 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
3348 \begin_layout Description
3349 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
3353 \begin_layout Description
3354 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
3355 Mathematical Society (AMS).
3356 There are three article layouts available.
3357 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
3358 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
3359 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
3360 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
3362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3365 sequential numbering
3366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3369 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3370 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3371 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3372 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3375 \begin_layout Description
3376 Beamer Layout for presentations
3379 \begin_layout Description
3380 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3381 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3382 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3383 with \SpecialChar LyX
3387 \begin_layout Description
3388 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3391 \begin_layout Description
3393 \begin_inset space ~
3396 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3399 \begin_layout Description
3400 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3403 \begin_layout Description
3404 Foils Used to make transparencies
3407 \begin_layout Description
3408 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3409 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3410 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3411 with \SpecialChar LyX
3415 \begin_layout Description
3416 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3417 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3420 \begin_layout Description
3421 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3424 \begin_layout Description
3425 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3428 \begin_layout Description
3429 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3430 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3431 (Is used by this document.)
3434 \begin_layout Description
3435 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3438 \begin_layout Description
3439 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3442 \begin_layout Description
3447 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3448 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3450 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3454 \begin_layout Description
3455 Slides Used to make transparencies
3458 \begin_layout Description
3460 \begin_inset space ~
3463 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3464 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3467 \begin_layout Description
3468 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3471 \begin_layout Standard
3472 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3474 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3476 Special Document Classes
3483 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3484 of the document classes.
3487 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3491 \begin_layout Standard
3492 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3494 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3495 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3497 \begin_inset Index idx
3500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3517 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3518 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3520 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3523 \begin_layout Standard
3526 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3531 , are highly specialized.
3533 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3534 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3535 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3536 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3537 by some document class.
3538 There are just too many of them.
3539 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3542 \begin_layout Standard
3543 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3544 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3548 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3551 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3552 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3553 document class for a new file.
3555 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3558 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3565 manual for information on how to install them.
3566 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3572 \begin_layout Standard
3573 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3574 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3575 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3576 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3577 class files to be used for dissertation
3578 s submitted to those universities.
3579 The \SpecialChar LyX
3580 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3582 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3586 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3592 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3595 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3597 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3599 name "subsec:Modules"
3604 \begin_inset Index idx
3607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3616 \begin_layout Standard
3617 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3618 chosen document class.
3619 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3620 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3627 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3631 \begin_inset Index idx
3634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3641 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3645 \begin_layout Standard
3646 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3647 packages or file format converters that are not always
3648 installed by default.
3650 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3651 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3652 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3653 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3655 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3656 file without the missing prerequisites.
3657 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3658 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3661 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3665 \begin_inset Index idx
3668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3669 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3676 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
3680 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
3684 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
3693 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
3695 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
3706 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3709 \begin_layout Standard
3710 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3718 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3720 will advise you about these things.
3728 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3730 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3732 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3737 \begin_inset Index idx
3740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3741 Document ! Local Layout
3749 \begin_layout Standard
3750 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3751 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3752 : They are intended to be used in
3753 a variety of different documents.
3754 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3755 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3756 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3757 need a specific inset or
3758 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
3760 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182122
3763 style only that one time.
3764 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3766 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3784 manual for information on how to use it.
3787 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3791 \begin_layout Standard
3792 Each class has a default set of options.
3793 Here's a quick table describing them:
3796 \begin_layout Standard
3797 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3803 \begin_layout Standard
3805 \begin_inset Tabular
3806 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3807 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3808 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3809 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3810 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3811 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3812 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4266 \begin_layout Standard
4267 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4273 \begin_layout Standard
4274 You're probably also wondering what
4275 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4279 \begin_inset space ~
4283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4287 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
4288 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
4293 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
4298 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
4308 headings, there are also
4316 headings, and so on.
4317 We will describe these headings fully in section
4318 \begin_inset space ~
4322 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4324 reference "subsec:Headings"
4331 \begin_layout Subsection
4333 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4335 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
4340 \begin_inset Index idx
4343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4350 \begin_inset Index idx
4353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4362 \begin_layout Standard
4363 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
4365 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4372 \begin_inset space ~
4380 \begin_inset space ~
4385 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
4387 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
4388 doesn't support special options you want to
4389 use for your document.
4390 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
4391 -class and its options, you have to read
4395 \begin_layout Standard
4397 \change_deleted -712698321 1597235163
4401 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182166
4405 \begin_inset space ~
4412 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4418 \begin_inset space ~
4423 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4424 You can choose between the following five options:
4427 \begin_layout Labeling
4428 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4433 Use default page style of current class.
4436 \begin_layout Labeling
4437 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4442 No page numbers or headings.
4445 \begin_layout Labeling
4446 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4454 \begin_layout Labeling
4455 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4460 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4461 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4462 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4463 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4466 \begin_layout Labeling
4467 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4472 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4473 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4479 \begin_inset Index idx
4482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4490 How they are defined is explained in section
4491 \begin_inset space ~
4495 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4497 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4504 \begin_layout Standard
4505 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4506 \begin_inset space ~
4510 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4512 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4519 \begin_layout Subsection
4520 Paper Size and Orientation
4521 \begin_inset Index idx
4524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4525 Document ! Paper size
4531 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4533 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4540 \begin_layout Standard
4541 You can find the following options in the menu
4544 \begin_inset space ~
4551 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4555 \begin_inset Index idx
4558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4567 \begin_layout Labeling
4568 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4572 \begin_inset space ~
4577 What size paper to print on.
4582 \begin_layout Itemize
4588 \begin_layout Itemize
4594 \begin_layout Itemize
4600 \begin_layout Itemize
4606 \begin_layout Itemize
4609 US letter, US legal, US executive
4612 \begin_layout Itemize
4618 \begin_layout Itemize
4625 \begin_layout Labeling
4626 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4631 To choose whether to output as
4642 \begin_layout Labeling
4643 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4647 \begin_inset space ~
4652 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4653 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4656 \begin_layout Subsection
4658 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4660 name "subsec:Margins"
4665 \begin_inset Index idx
4668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4675 \begin_inset Index idx
4678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4687 \begin_layout Standard
4688 Paper margins are set in the menu
4690 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4694 \begin_inset Index idx
4697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4706 \begin_layout Standard
4707 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4708 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4709 the paper format and the font size into account.
4712 \begin_layout Subsection
4716 \begin_layout Standard
4717 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4718 has to convert everything into the new
4720 That includes the paragraph environments.
4721 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4722 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4723 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4725 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4726 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4734 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4736 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4737 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4738 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4741 \begin_layout Section
4742 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4743 \begin_inset Index idx
4746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4747 Paragraph ! Indentation
4755 \begin_layout Subsection
4757 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4759 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4766 \begin_layout Standard
4767 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4768 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4771 \begin_layout Standard
4772 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4773 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4774 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4775 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4779 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4785 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4786 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4787 language than English.
4789 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4792 \begin_layout Standard
4793 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4794 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4795 into \SpecialChar LyX
4797 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4800 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4802 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4803 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4804 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4811 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4812 goes to produce a printable file.
4817 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4819 gives you the ability globally to change
4823 these pre-coded spacings.
4824 We will explain more later.
4827 \begin_layout Subsection
4828 Paragraph Separation
4829 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4831 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4836 \begin_inset Index idx
4839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4840 Paragraph ! Separation
4848 \begin_layout Standard
4856 \begin_inset space ~
4864 \begin_inset space ~
4871 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4875 \begin_inset Index idx
4878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4884 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4887 \begin_layout Subsection
4891 \begin_layout Standard
4892 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4895 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4897 \begin_inset space ~
4902 dialog and toggle the
4905 \begin_inset space ~
4910 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4913 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4917 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4918 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4922 \begin_layout Standard
4923 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4924 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4927 \begin_layout Subsection
4929 \begin_inset Index idx
4932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4933 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4941 \begin_layout Standard
4944 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4948 \begin_inset Index idx
4951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4960 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4964 \begin_inset space ~
4973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4974 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4980 \begin_inset Index idx
4983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4990 installed to use this feature.
4995 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4997 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4999 \begin_inset space ~
5004 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
5005 is normally defined in the environment's style.
5008 \begin_layout Section
5009 Paragraph Environments
5010 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5012 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
5017 \begin_inset Index idx
5020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5021 Paragraph ! Environments
5027 \begin_inset Index idx
5030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5031 Paragraph environments|(
5039 \begin_layout Subsection
5043 \begin_layout Standard
5044 Paragraph environments correspond to the
5047 \begin_layout Standard
5056 } \SpecialChar ldots
5066 \begin_inset Newline newline
5069 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
5071 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
5072 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
5073 alien to you, we urge you to read the
5082 also contains many more examples than this section does.
5085 \begin_layout Standard
5086 A paragraph environment is simply a
5087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5094 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
5095 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
5096 scheme, labels, and so on.
5097 Additionally, you can
5098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5105 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
5106 to inherit some of the properties of another.
5107 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
5108 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
5110 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
5112 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
5115 \begin_layout Standard
5116 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
5117 \begin_inset Graphics
5118 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
5124 at the left end of the toolbar.
5126 will change the environment of the
5130 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
5131 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
5132 you select them before choosing the new environment.
5135 \begin_layout Standard
5144 create a new paragraph using the
5148 paragraph environment.
5150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5157 because if you are in one of these environments:
5160 \begin_layout Itemize
5166 \begin_layout Itemize
5172 \begin_layout Itemize
5178 \begin_layout Itemize
5184 \begin_layout Itemize
5190 \begin_layout Itemize
5196 \begin_layout Itemize
5202 \begin_layout Standard
5204 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
5208 , rather than resetting it to
5213 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
5214 \begin_inset space ~
5218 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5220 reference "sec:Nesting"
5227 \begin_layout Subsection
5231 \begin_layout Standard
5232 The default paragraph environment is
5237 It creates a plain paragraph.
5239 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
5240 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
5241 this manual) are in the
5248 \begin_layout Standard
5249 You can nest a paragraph using the
5253 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
5261 \begin_layout Subsection
5263 \begin_inset Index idx
5266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5275 \begin_layout Standard
5276 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
5277 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
5279 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5286 for thanks or contact information.
5287 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5288 places all of this on a separate page
5289 along with today's date.
5290 For other types of documents, the title
5291 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5295 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5298 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
5301 \begin_layout Standard
5303 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
5317 Here's how you use them:
5320 \begin_layout Itemize
5321 Put the title of your document in the
5328 \begin_layout Itemize
5329 Put the author name in the
5336 \begin_layout Itemize
5337 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
5338 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
5344 Note that using this environment is optional.
5345 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5346 will automatically insert today's date.
5347 If you don't want a date, use the option
5349 Suppress default date on front page
5353 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5354 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
5356 \begin_inset space ~
5364 \begin_layout Standard
5365 You can use footnotes to insert
5366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5373 or contact information.
5376 \begin_layout Subsection
5378 \begin_inset Index idx
5381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5388 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5390 name "subsec:Headings"
5397 \begin_layout Standard
5398 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5400 takes care of the numbering for you.
5403 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5405 \begin_inset Index idx
5408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5409 Section headings ! Numbered
5417 \begin_layout Standard
5418 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5422 \begin_layout Enumerate
5428 \begin_layout Enumerate
5434 \begin_layout Enumerate
5440 \begin_layout Enumerate
5446 \begin_layout Enumerate
5452 \begin_layout Enumerate
5458 \begin_layout Enumerate
5464 \begin_layout Standard
5466 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5467 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5468 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with
5469 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182388
5471 \change_deleted 5863208 1598182398
5473 \change_deleted -131811572 1596358192
5479 \begin_layout Standard
5480 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5481 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5482 You group the book into chapters.
5484 does a similar grouping:
5487 \begin_layout Itemize
5492 is divided into either
5503 \begin_layout Itemize
5515 \begin_layout Itemize
5527 \begin_layout Itemize
5539 \begin_layout Itemize
5551 \begin_layout Itemize
5563 \begin_layout Standard
5564 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5572 Not all document types use the
5576 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5581 is the top-level heading.
5589 \begin_layout Standard
5594 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5595 labels it with its number,
5596 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5598 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5610 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5612 \begin_inset Index idx
5615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5616 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5624 \begin_layout Standard
5625 The unnumbered section headings have a
5626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5633 at the end of their name.
5634 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5635 the table of contents, see section
5636 \begin_inset space ~
5640 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5649 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5650 Changing the Numbering
5651 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5653 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5660 \begin_layout Standard
5661 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5662 in the Table of Contents.
5663 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5665 Just as certain classes start with
5679 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5689 This is something you can change.
5692 \begin_layout Standard
5695 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5699 \begin_inset Index idx
5702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5711 \begin_inset space ~
5715 \begin_inset space ~
5720 you will see two counters.
5725 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5726 numbers a section heading.
5727 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5731 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5732 Short Titles of Headings
5733 \begin_inset Index idx
5736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5737 Section headings ! Short titles
5743 \begin_inset Argument 1
5746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5753 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5755 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5762 \begin_layout Standard
5763 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5764 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5765 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5766 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5769 \begin_layout Standard
5771 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5772 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5773 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5774 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5777 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5779 \begin_inset space ~
5785 This will insert a box labeled
5786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5790 \begin_inset space ~
5794 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5797 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5798 This also works for captions inside floats.
5799 There can only be one short title per title.
5802 \begin_layout Standard
5803 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5806 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5810 \begin_layout Standard
5811 The following information applies to all section headings:
5814 \begin_layout Itemize
5815 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5818 \begin_layout Itemize
5819 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5822 \begin_layout Itemize
5823 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5826 \begin_layout Itemize
5827 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5830 \begin_layout Subsection
5834 \begin_layout Standard
5836 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5850 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5851 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5852 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5853 the text they contain.
5854 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5862 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5865 \begin_layout Standard
5866 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5875 when you start a new paragraph.
5876 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5880 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5881 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5882 have to change back to the
5886 environment yourself.
5889 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5891 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5898 \begin_inset Index idx
5901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5910 \begin_layout Standard
5911 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5912 time for the differences.
5921 are identical except for one difference:
5925 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5934 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5937 \begin_layout Standard
5938 Here's an example of the
5951 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5953 See – no indentation!
5957 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5958 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5959 the other paragraph.
5962 \begin_layout Standard
5963 Here's another example, this time in the
5970 \begin_layout Quotation
5976 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5977 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5978 the first line, then
5982 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5986 you were quoting other text.
5989 \begin_layout Quotation
5990 Here's a new paragraph.
5991 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5992 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5995 \begin_layout Standard
5996 As the examples show,
6000 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
6001 They should put quotes in the
6006 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
6010 paragraph environment for quoted text.
6013 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6015 \begin_inset Index idx
6018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6025 \begin_inset Index idx
6028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6035 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6044 \begin_layout Standard
6049 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
6055 \begin_inset Newline newline
6058 Which I did not rehearse!
6062 It could be much worse.
6063 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
6065 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
6066 indented a bit more than the first.
6067 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
6073 \begin_inset Newline newline
6076 And make things look fine
6077 \begin_inset Newline newline
6083 arg "newline-insert newline"
6089 \begin_layout Standard
6094 does not indent both margins.
6095 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
6096 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
6099 arg "newline-insert newline"
6105 \begin_layout Subsection
6107 \begin_inset Index idx
6110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6117 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6126 \begin_layout Standard
6128 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
6138 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
6139 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
6148 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
6149 lets you provide your own label.
6150 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
6151 describing some general features of all four of them.
6154 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6158 \begin_layout Standard
6159 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
6161 First, \SpecialChar LyX
6162 treats each paragraph as a list item.
6171 reset the environment to
6175 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
6176 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
6177 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
6181 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
6185 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
6192 \begin_layout Standard
6193 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
6194 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
6195 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
6197 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
6198 you read all of section
6199 \begin_inset space ~
6203 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6205 reference "sec:Nesting"
6212 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6214 \begin_inset Index idx
6217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6224 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6233 \begin_layout Standard
6234 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
6238 paragraph environment.
6239 It has the following properties:
6242 \begin_layout Itemize
6243 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
6247 \begin_layout Itemize
6249 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
6252 \begin_layout Itemize
6253 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
6257 \begin_layout Itemize
6258 The items can have any length.
6260 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
6261 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
6268 \begin_layout Itemize
6273 environment inside another
6277 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
6281 \begin_layout Itemize
6282 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
6285 \begin_layout Itemize
6287 always shows the same symbol on screen.
6290 \begin_layout Itemize
6292 \begin_inset space ~
6296 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6298 reference "sec:Nesting"
6302 for a full explanation of nesting.
6306 \begin_layout Standard
6307 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
6316 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
6319 \begin_layout Standard
6320 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
6321 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
6324 \begin_layout Itemize
6325 The label for the first level
6329 is a large black dot, or bullet.
6333 \begin_layout Itemize
6334 The label for the second level is a dash.
6338 \begin_layout Itemize
6339 The label for the third is an asterisk.
6343 \begin_layout Itemize
6344 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
6348 \begin_layout Itemize
6349 Back out to the third level.
6353 \begin_layout Itemize
6354 Back to the second level.
6358 \begin_layout Itemize
6359 Back to the outermost level.
6362 \begin_layout Standard
6363 These are the default labels for an
6368 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
6370 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6373 dialog in the submenu
6378 \begin_inset Index idx
6381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6387 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
6391 \begin_layout Standard
6392 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
6393 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
6395 \begin_inset space ~
6399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6401 reference "sec:Nesting"
6408 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6410 \begin_inset Index idx
6413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6420 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6422 name "sec:Enumerate"
6429 \begin_layout Standard
6434 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6435 It has these properties:
6438 \begin_layout Enumerate
6439 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6443 \begin_layout Enumerate
6444 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6448 \begin_layout Enumerate
6450 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6453 \begin_layout Enumerate
6458 environment resets the counter to one.
6461 \begin_layout Enumerate
6474 \begin_layout Enumerate
6475 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6476 Items can have any length.
6479 \begin_layout Enumerate
6480 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6483 \begin_layout Enumerate
6484 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6487 \begin_layout Enumerate
6488 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6492 \begin_layout Standard
6501 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6503 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6504 labels the four different levels in an
6511 \begin_layout Enumerate
6512 The first level of an
6516 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6520 \begin_layout Enumerate
6521 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6525 \begin_layout Enumerate
6526 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6530 \begin_layout Enumerate
6531 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6534 \begin_layout Enumerate
6535 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6540 \begin_layout Enumerate
6541 Back to the third level
6545 \begin_layout Enumerate
6546 Back to the second level.
6550 \begin_layout Enumerate
6551 Back to the outermost level.
6554 \begin_layout Standard
6555 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6559 environment, see section
6560 \begin_inset space ~
6564 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6566 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6571 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6575 \begin_layout Standard
6576 There is more to nesting
6580 environments than we've stated here.
6581 You should read section
6582 \begin_inset space ~
6586 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6588 reference "sec:Nesting"
6592 to learn more about nesting.
6595 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6597 \begin_inset Index idx
6600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6609 \begin_layout Standard
6610 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6614 list has no fixed label.
6615 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6624 of the first line as the label.
6628 \begin_layout Description
6629 Example: This is an example of the
6636 \begin_layout Standard
6638 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6642 \begin_layout Standard
6644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6651 it is meant that the first usage of the
6655 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6657 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6665 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6670 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6671 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6673 \begin_inset space ~
6679 \begin_inset space ~
6683 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6685 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6689 for more information.) Here is an example:
6692 \begin_layout Description
6694 \begin_inset space ~
6697 Example: This one shows how to use a
6700 \begin_inset space ~
6712 \begin_layout Description
6713 Usage: You should use the
6717 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6718 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6720 It's not a good idea to use a
6724 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6725 You're better off using
6737 paragraphs into them.
6740 \begin_layout Description
6741 Nesting: You can nest
6745 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6749 \begin_layout Standard
6750 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6751 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6752 them from the first line.
6755 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6757 \begin_inset Index idx
6760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6769 \begin_layout Standard
6774 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6775 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6779 \begin_layout Standard
6788 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6790 Here are its properties:
6793 \begin_layout Labeling
6794 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6796 \begin_inset space ~
6799 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6808 of each line as the item label.
6813 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6814 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6815 space as described above.
6818 \begin_layout Labeling
6819 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6820 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6821 uses different margins for the item label and the
6822 body of the item text.
6823 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6824 label width plus a little extra space.
6827 \begin_layout Labeling
6828 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6830 \begin_inset space ~
6833 width \SpecialChar LyX
6834 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6835 If the label width is larger, the label
6836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6843 into the first line.
6844 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6845 margin of the rest of the item text.
6848 \begin_layout Labeling
6849 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6851 \begin_inset space ~
6854 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6859 environment has the same left margin.
6860 \begin_inset Newline newline
6863 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6866 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6868 \begin_inset space ~
6873 dialog (toolbar button
6876 arg "layout-paragraph"
6883 \begin_inset space ~
6888 determines the default label width.
6889 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6898 multiple times instead.
6899 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6909 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6912 \begin_inset space ~
6917 every time you alter a label in a
6922 \begin_inset Newline newline
6925 The predefined default width is the length of
6926 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6930 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6934 \begin_inset space ~
6940 \begin_layout Standard
6945 list the same way as the
6949 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6955 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6959 \begin_layout Standard
6964 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6965 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6967 \begin_inset space ~
6971 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6973 reference "sec:Nesting"
6977 to learn about nesting.
6980 \begin_layout Standard
6981 There is yet another feature of the
6985 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6986 left-justifies the item labels by
6988 You can use additional
6992 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6993 justifies the item label.
6998 are documented in section
6999 \begin_inset space ~
7003 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7005 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
7010 Here are some examples:
7013 \begin_layout Labeling
7014 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7015 Left The default for
7022 \begin_layout Labeling
7023 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7024 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7031 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
7034 \begin_layout Labeling
7035 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7036 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7040 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7047 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
7050 \begin_layout Subsection
7052 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7054 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
7059 \begin_inset Index idx
7062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7071 \begin_layout Standard
7072 The features described in this section require that the module
7074 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
7076 is loaded in the document settings.
7077 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7083 \begin_inset Index idx
7086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7096 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7097 Custom Enumerate Lists
7098 \begin_inset Index idx
7101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7102 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
7110 \begin_layout Standard
7112 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
7115 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7118 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
7119 There you add the command
7122 \begin_layout Standard
7130 \begin_layout Standard
7142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7143 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
7144 Code, look at section
7145 \begin_inset space ~
7149 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7151 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
7164 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
7171 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
7172 For capital Roman numerals replace
7184 in the command above.
7185 For Arabic numerals use
7193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7200 items with capital or small Latin letters use
7215 \begin_layout Standard
7217 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7225 You can only number 26
7226 \begin_inset space ~
7229 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
7237 \begin_layout Standard
7238 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
7239 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
7242 \begin_layout Standard
7243 Here is a list with custom numbering:
7246 \begin_layout Enumerate
7247 \begin_inset Argument 1
7250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7276 \begin_layout Enumerate
7277 \begin_inset Argument 1
7280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7303 \begin_layout Enumerate
7308 \begin_layout Enumerate
7309 \begin_inset Argument 1
7312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7336 \begin_layout Enumerate
7337 \begin_inset Argument 1
7340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7366 \begin_layout Standard
7367 For this list these commands were used:
7370 \begin_layout Standard
7381 \begin_inset Newline newline
7389 \begin_inset Newline newline
7397 \begin_inset Newline newline
7407 \begin_layout Standard
7414 makes the label emphasized and
7423 \begin_layout Standard
7424 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7432 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7433 lists until you change the definition.
7441 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7443 \begin_inset Index idx
7446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7447 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7455 \begin_layout Standard
7456 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7459 \begin_layout Enumerate
7460 \begin_inset Argument 1
7463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7482 \begin_inset Note Note
7485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7486 goes back to default numbering
7494 \begin_layout Enumerate
7498 \begin_layout Standard
7502 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7506 \begin_layout Standard
7507 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7512 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7513 to indicate that it is a resumed
7514 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7515 , but in the output.
7518 \begin_layout Standard
7519 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7527 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7536 \begin_layout Standard
7537 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7539 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7540 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7541 of a normal enumeration.
7542 There, insert the command
7545 \begin_layout Standard
7551 \begin_layout Standard
7556 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7560 \begin_layout Enumerate
7564 \begin_layout Enumerate
7568 \begin_layout Standard
7569 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7572 \begin_layout Enumerate
7573 \begin_inset Argument 1
7576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7592 This enumeration starts at 4
7595 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7597 \begin_inset Index idx
7600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7609 \begin_layout Standard
7610 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7612 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7615 \begin_layout Itemize
7619 \begin_layout Itemize
7620 with standard spacing
7623 \begin_layout Standard
7624 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7626 Add there the command
7630 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7633 \begin_layout Itemize
7634 \begin_inset Argument 1
7637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7656 \begin_layout Itemize
7660 \begin_layout Itemize
7664 \begin_layout Standard
7665 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7672 \begin_inset Index idx
7675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7683 For more information see its documentation,
7684 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7694 \begin_layout Standard
7695 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7697 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7698 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7699 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7702 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7705 \begin_layout Enumerate
7706 \begin_inset Argument 1
7709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7717 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7730 \begin_layout Enumerate
7731 with negative indentation
7734 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7735 Further Customization
7736 \begin_inset Index idx
7739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7740 Lists ! Customization
7748 \begin_layout Standard
7749 You can also change the style of description lists.
7753 \begin_layout Standard
7759 \begin_layout Standard
7760 changes the description label font, the command
7763 \begin_layout Standard
7769 \begin_layout Standard
7770 sets the list style.
7773 \begin_layout Standard
7774 An example where the command
7777 \begin_layout Standard
7782 itshape, style=nextline
7785 \begin_layout Standard
7789 \begin_layout Description
7791 \begin_inset space ~
7795 \begin_inset Argument 1
7798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7804 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7806 itshape, style=nextline
7816 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7817 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7821 \begin_layout Description
7823 \begin_inset space ~
7826 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7827 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7828 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7831 \begin_layout Standard
7832 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7838 \begin_inset Index idx
7841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7849 For more information see its documentation
7850 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7860 \begin_layout Subsection
7862 \begin_inset Index idx
7865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7874 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7876 \begin_inset space ~
7879 Address: An Overview
7882 \begin_layout Standard
7883 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7884 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7892 \begin_inset space ~
7898 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7899 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7900 gags on the document.
7901 In contrast, you can use the
7908 \begin_inset space ~
7913 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7914 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7918 \begin_layout Standard
7919 Of course, you're not limited to using
7926 \begin_inset space ~
7935 \begin_inset space ~
7940 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7941 some European academic papers.
7944 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7946 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7948 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7955 \begin_layout Standard
7960 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7961 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7965 \begin_inset space ~
7970 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7971 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7972 Here's an example of each:
7975 \begin_layout Right Address
7977 \begin_inset Newline newline
7981 \begin_inset Newline newline
7985 \begin_inset Newline newline
7988 When is it? What is today?
7991 \begin_layout Standard
7995 \begin_inset space ~
8001 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
8003 the largest block of text on a single line.
8004 Here's an example of the
8011 \begin_layout Address
8013 \begin_inset Newline newline
8016 Where do I send this
8017 \begin_inset Newline newline
8020 Your post office and country
8023 \begin_layout Standard
8024 As you can see, both
8031 \begin_inset space ~
8036 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
8041 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
8042 resets the nesting depth and sets the
8048 This makes sense, since
8056 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
8057 Thus, you have to use
8064 arg "newline-insert newline"
8069 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
8070 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
8072 \begin_inset space ~
8076 \begin_inset space ~
8081 ) to start a new line in an
8088 \begin_inset space ~
8096 \begin_layout Subsection
8100 \begin_layout Standard
8101 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
8102 or list of references.
8104 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
8107 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8109 \begin_inset Index idx
8112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8121 \begin_layout Standard
8126 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
8127 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8128 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
8129 Also, don't bother trying to nest
8133 in anything else or vice versa.
8139 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
8140 The book document classes ignores the
8144 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
8148 in a letter document class.
8151 \begin_layout Standard
8156 environment does several things for you.
8157 First, it puts the centered label
8158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8166 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
8168 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
8169 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
8170 the subsequent text.
8171 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
8173 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
8177 \begin_layout Standard
8178 Starting a new paragraph by entering
8182 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8183 The new paragraph will still be in the
8188 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
8189 finish entering the abstract of your document.
8192 \begin_layout Standard
8193 \begin_inset Float figure
8200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8202 \begin_inset Graphics
8203 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
8210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8211 \begin_inset Caption Standard
8213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8214 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8216 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8237 \begin_layout Standard
8238 We would love to demonstrate the
8242 environment, but since this document is in the
8243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8247 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8250 class, we can't do this.
8251 We inserted it therefore as figure
8252 \begin_inset space ~
8256 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8258 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8263 If you have never heard of an
8264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8271 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
8274 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8276 \begin_inset Index idx
8279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8286 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8288 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
8295 \begin_layout Standard
8300 environment is used to list references.
8301 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8302 only use it at the end of the document.
8314 \begin_layout Standard
8315 When you first open a
8319 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
8320 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
8321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8329 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8336 depending on the document class.
8337 The heading is in a large boldface font.
8338 Each paragraph of the
8342 environment is a bibliography entry.
8347 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8348 Each new paragraph is still in the
8355 \begin_layout Standard
8356 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
8357 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
8359 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
8361 handling, have a look at section
8362 \begin_inset space ~
8366 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8368 reference "sec:Bibliography"
8375 \begin_layout Subsection
8376 Special Environments
8379 \begin_layout Standard
8381 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
8382 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
8385 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8390 \begin_inset Index idx
8393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8401 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8403 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8410 \begin_layout Standard
8416 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8418 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8423 key as a fixed whitespace.
8427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8440 \begin_inset space ~
8445 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8463 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8466 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8469 arg "newline-insert newline"
8486 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8487 So, when you finish using the
8492 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8493 Also, you can nest the
8498 environment inside of others.
8501 \begin_layout Standard
8502 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8505 \begin_layout Itemize
8509 arg "newline-insert newline"
8512 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8513 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8517 \begin_inset space \space{}
8527 arg "newline-insert newline"
8533 \begin_layout Itemize
8537 arg "newline-insert newline"
8547 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8553 \begin_layout Itemize
8554 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8555 You must put at least one
8559 in any line you want blank.
8560 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8564 \begin_layout Itemize
8565 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8569 since that will insert
8574 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8577 arg "self-insert \""
8583 \begin_layout Standard
8587 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8591 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8595 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8599 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8603 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8604 printf("Hello World!
8609 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8613 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8617 \begin_layout Standard
8618 This is just the standard
8619 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8623 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8629 \begin_layout Standard
8635 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8637 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8638 as if you used a typewriter.
8639 \begin_inset Index idx
8642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8643 Paragraph environments|)
8648 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8651 Program Code Listings
8656 \begin_inset space ~
8664 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8668 \begin_inset Index idx
8671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8680 \begin_layout Standard
8685 environment is similar to the
8690 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8691 computer console text.
8696 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8710 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8711 you can have empty lines.
8724 \begin_layout Itemize
8725 have a certain language and a text style
8728 \begin_layout Itemize
8729 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8730 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8731 and \SpecialChar TeX
8735 \begin_layout Standard
8736 Because of these properties
8740 works like a typewriter.
8744 \begin_layout Verbatim
8749 \begin_layout Verbatim
8753 The following 2 lines are empty:
8756 \begin_layout Verbatim
8760 \begin_layout Verbatim
8764 \begin_layout Verbatim
8766 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8771 \begin_layout Standard
8776 environment is identical to
8780 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8781 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8788 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8793 \begin_layout Section
8794 Nesting Environments
8795 \begin_inset Index idx
8798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8799 Nesting ! Environments
8805 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8814 \begin_layout Subsection
8818 \begin_layout Standard
8820 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8822 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8824 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8826 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8838 \begin_layout Enumerate
8842 \begin_layout Enumerate
8847 \begin_layout Enumerate
8851 \begin_layout Enumerate
8856 \begin_layout Enumerate
8860 \begin_layout Standard
8861 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8862 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8864 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8866 \begin_inset space ~
8870 \begin_inset space ~
8878 \begin_inset space ~
8882 \begin_inset space ~
8887 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8889 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8892 arg "depth-increment"
8898 arg "depth-decrement"
8912 arg "depth-increment"
8918 arg "depth-decrement"
8922 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8923 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8927 \begin_layout Standard
8928 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8929 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8930 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8931 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8932 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8935 \begin_layout Standard
8936 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8938 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8940 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8943 \begin_layout Subsection
8944 What You Can and Can't Nest
8947 \begin_layout Standard
8948 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8949 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8952 \begin_layout Standard
8953 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8954 than a simple yes or no.
8955 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8958 \begin_layout Itemize
8959 Completely unnestable
8962 \begin_layout Itemize
8963 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8967 \begin_layout Itemize
8968 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8972 \begin_layout Standard
8973 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8974 environments have them:
8977 \begin_layout Description
8978 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8979 Can't nest into them.
8983 \begin_layout Itemize
8989 \begin_layout Itemize
8995 \begin_layout Itemize
9001 \begin_layout Itemize
9007 \begin_layout Itemize
9014 \begin_layout Description
9016 \begin_inset space ~
9019 Nestable You can nest them.
9020 You can nest other things into them.
9024 \begin_layout Itemize
9030 \begin_layout Itemize
9036 \begin_layout Itemize
9042 \begin_layout Itemize
9048 \begin_layout Itemize
9054 \begin_layout Itemize
9060 \begin_layout Itemize
9066 \begin_layout Itemize
9073 \begin_layout Itemize
9079 \begin_layout Itemize
9086 \begin_layout Description
9087 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
9088 You can't nest anything into them.
9092 \begin_layout Itemize
9098 \begin_layout Itemize
9104 \begin_layout Itemize
9110 \begin_layout Itemize
9116 \begin_layout Itemize
9122 \begin_layout Itemize
9128 \begin_layout Itemize
9134 \begin_layout Itemize
9140 \begin_layout Itemize
9146 \begin_layout Itemize
9152 \begin_layout Itemize
9158 \begin_layout Itemize
9164 \begin_layout Itemize
9170 \begin_layout Itemize
9174 \begin_inset space ~
9180 \begin_layout Itemize
9187 \begin_layout Standard
9188 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
9191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9196 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
9206 \begin_inset space ~
9209 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
9210 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
9211 nested section headings violate this.
9219 \begin_layout Subsection
9220 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
9221 \begin_inset Index idx
9224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9225 Nesting ! Tables etc.
9233 \begin_layout Standard
9234 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
9235 affected by nesting anyhow.
9239 \begin_layout Itemize
9243 \begin_layout Itemize
9247 \begin_layout Itemize
9251 \begin_layout Standard
9253 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
9256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9261 Figures and tables in
9265 are not affected by this.
9270 Have a look at section
9271 \begin_inset space ~
9275 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9277 reference "sec:Floats"
9281 for more information about
9288 \begin_layout Standard
9290 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
9291 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
9295 \begin_layout Standard
9296 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
9297 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9301 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9304 of its own, it behaves just like a
9305 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9309 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9312 paragraph environment.
9313 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
9317 \begin_layout Standard
9318 Here's an example with a table:
9321 \begin_layout Enumerate
9326 \begin_layout Enumerate
9327 This is (a) and it's nested.
9331 \begin_layout Standard
9332 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9338 \begin_layout Standard
9340 \begin_inset Tabular
9341 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9342 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9343 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9344 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9428 \begin_layout Standard
9429 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9436 \begin_layout Enumerate
9438 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9442 \begin_layout Enumerate
9446 \begin_layout Standard
9447 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9450 \begin_layout Enumerate
9455 \begin_layout Enumerate
9456 This is (a) and it's nested.
9460 \begin_layout Standard
9461 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9467 \begin_layout Standard
9469 \begin_inset Tabular
9470 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9471 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9472 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9473 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9557 \begin_layout Standard
9558 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9564 \begin_layout Enumerate
9571 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9574 \begin_layout Enumerate
9578 \begin_layout Standard
9579 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9583 \begin_layout Standard
9584 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9587 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9590 \begin_layout Enumerate
9595 \begin_layout Enumerate
9596 This is (a) and it's nested.
9599 \begin_layout Standard
9600 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9606 \begin_layout Standard
9608 \begin_inset Tabular
9609 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9610 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9611 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9612 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9697 \begin_layout Standard
9698 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9704 \begin_layout Enumerate
9706 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9713 \begin_layout Enumerate
9717 \begin_layout Standard
9718 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9724 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9725 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9729 \begin_layout Subsection
9730 Usage and General Features
9733 \begin_layout Standard
9734 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9735 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9744 is the innermost possible depth.
9745 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9748 \begin_layout Enumerate
9749 level #1 – outermost
9753 \begin_layout Enumerate
9758 \begin_layout Enumerate
9763 \begin_layout Enumerate
9768 \begin_layout Itemize
9773 \begin_layout Itemize
9782 \begin_layout Standard
9783 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9784 both of them in the example.
9785 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9795 For example, if we tried to nest another
9800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9807 , we would get errors.
9810 \begin_layout Subsection
9812 \begin_inset Index idx
9815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9824 \begin_layout Standard
9825 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9826 We have several examples of nested environments.
9827 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9831 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9832 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9835 \begin_layout Labeling
9836 \labelwidthstring MMM
9837 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9846 \begin_layout Labeling
9847 \labelwidthstring MMM
9848 #2-a This is level #2.
9849 We created it by using
9852 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9858 arg "depth-increment"
9865 \begin_layout Labeling
9866 \labelwidthstring MMM
9867 #3-a This is level #3.
9868 This time, we just enter
9875 arg "depth-increment"
9879 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9883 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9889 arg "depth-increment"
9896 \begin_layout Standard
9901 environment, nested inside of
9902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9910 So, it's at level #4.
9911 We did this by entering
9914 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9920 arg "depth-increment"
9923 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9928 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9944 \begin_layout Standard
9949 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9952 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9958 \begin_layout Labeling
9959 \labelwidthstring MMM
9960 #4-a This is level #4.
9964 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9967 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9972 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9976 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9981 keep nesting things inside
9982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9993 \begin_layout Labeling
9994 \labelwidthstring MMM
9995 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
10000 \begin_layout Labeling
10001 \labelwidthstring MMM
10002 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
10003 and this is level #6.
10004 By now, you should know how we made these two.
10008 \begin_layout Labeling
10009 \labelwidthstring MMM
10010 #5-b Back to level #5.
10014 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10020 arg "depth-decrement"
10027 \begin_layout Labeling
10028 \labelwidthstring MMM
10032 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10038 arg "depth-decrement"
10041 , we're back at level #4.
10045 \begin_layout Labeling
10046 \labelwidthstring MMM
10047 #3-b Back to level #3.
10048 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
10052 \begin_layout Labeling
10053 \labelwidthstring MMM
10054 #2-b Back to level #2.
10058 \begin_layout Labeling
10059 \labelwidthstring MMM
10060 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
10061 After this sentence, we will enter
10065 and change the paragraph environment back to
10072 \begin_layout Standard
10073 We could have also used the
10089 environment in place of the
10094 The example would have worked exactly the same.
10097 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10098 Example 2: Inheritance
10101 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10102 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
10105 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10114 arg "depth-increment"
10118 \begin_inset Newline newline
10121 which, we will change to the
10129 \begin_layout Enumerate
10134 environment, at level #2.
10137 \begin_layout Enumerate
10138 Notice how the nested
10142 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
10146 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
10150 \begin_layout Standard
10151 We ended this example by entering
10156 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
10160 and reset the nesting depth by using
10163 arg "depth-decrement"
10169 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10170 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
10179 \begin_inset Argument 1
10182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10183 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
10191 \begin_layout Enumerate
10192 This is level #1, in an
10196 paragraph environment.
10197 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
10201 \begin_layout Enumerate
10206 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10212 arg "depth-increment"
10216 Now, what happens if we nest an
10220 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
10221 label be? An asterisk?
10225 \begin_layout Itemize
10235 environment, even though it's at level #3.
10236 So, its label is a bullet.
10237 (We got here by using
10240 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10246 arg "depth-increment"
10249 , then changing the environment to
10257 \begin_layout Itemize
10258 Here's level #4, produced using
10261 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10267 arg "depth-increment"
10271 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
10276 \begin_layout Enumerate
10278 to get to level #5.
10279 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
10284 Notice the type of numbering, it is
10288 , because we are in the
10296 environment (that is, it is an
10311 \begin_layout Enumerate
10316 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
10317 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
10321 \begin_layout Enumerate
10322 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
10325 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10328 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
10331 \begin_layout Enumerate
10335 arg "depth-decrement"
10338 to decrease the depth after the next
10341 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10348 \begin_layout Enumerate
10350 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
10355 \begin_layout Enumerate
10357 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
10358 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
10362 \begin_layout Enumerate
10363 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
10372 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
10377 reset the counter for the label.
10381 \begin_layout Enumerate
10385 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10391 arg "depth-decrement"
10394 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
10395 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
10396 into the twofold-nested
10404 \begin_layout Enumerate
10405 The same thing happens if we do another
10408 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10414 arg "depth-decrement"
10417 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10420 \begin_layout Standard
10421 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10426 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10437 The number of other
10441 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10448 The same rule applies for the
10452 environment, as well.
10455 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10456 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10459 \begin_layout Enumerate
10460 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10461 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10462 the same detail with how we did it.
10471 \begin_layout Standard
10479 arg "depth-increment"
10486 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10487 the example in parentheses someplace.
10488 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10489 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10490 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10494 \begin_layout Enumerate
10499 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10503 \begin_layout Verse
10504 Now we will add verse.
10505 \begin_inset Newline newline
10508 It will get much worse.
10509 \begin_inset Newline newline
10519 arg "depth-increment"
10529 \begin_layout Verse
10530 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10531 \begin_inset Newline newline
10534 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10535 \begin_inset Newline newline
10541 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10549 \begin_layout Verse
10550 Here comes a table:
10554 \begin_layout Standard
10555 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10561 \begin_layout Standard
10563 \begin_inset Tabular
10564 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10565 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10566 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10567 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10652 \begin_layout Verse
10656 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10666 arg "depth-increment"
10672 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10678 \begin_inset Newline newline
10686 arg "depth-decrement"
10693 \begin_layout Enumerate
10698 : level #1) This is another item.
10699 Note that selecting a
10703 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10704 3 times to put the table inside the
10711 \begin_layout Quotation
10712 We're now ending the
10716 list and changing to
10721 We're still at level #1.
10722 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10723 The next set of paragraphs is a
10724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10731 We will nest both the
10738 \begin_inset space ~
10743 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10747 for the letter body.
10751 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10754 to preserve the depth.
10755 Remember that you need to use
10758 arg "newline-insert newline"
10761 to create multiple lines inside the
10768 \begin_inset space ~
10778 \begin_layout Right Address
10780 \begin_inset Newline newline
10783 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10784 \begin_inset Newline newline
10790 \begin_layout Address
10792 \begin_inset space ~
10798 \begin_layout Quotation
10799 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10800 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10803 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10804 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10805 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10806 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10807 as soon as possible.
10808 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10811 \begin_layout Quotation
10812 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10813 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10814 with your order, along with payment.
10817 \begin_layout Quotation
10818 We thank you again for your patience.
10821 \begin_layout Address
10823 \begin_inset Newline newline
10830 \begin_layout Quotation
10831 That ends that example!
10834 \begin_layout Standard
10835 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10836 gives you a lot of power with just
10838 We could have easily nested an
10859 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10862 \begin_layout Subsection
10864 \begin_inset Index idx
10867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10868 Nesting ! Separation
10874 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10876 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10883 \begin_layout Standard
10884 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10886 For example you need two different enumerations:
10889 \begin_layout Enumerate
10894 \begin_layout Enumerate
10899 \begin_layout Enumerate
10903 \begin_layout Standard
10904 \begin_inset Separator plain
10910 \begin_layout Itemize
10916 \begin_layout Standard
10917 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10923 \begin_layout Enumerate
10927 \begin_layout Enumerate
10931 \begin_layout Enumerate
10935 \begin_layout Standard
10936 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10937 list item and use the menu
10939 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10940 Separated <Name> Above
10944 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10945 Separated <Name> Below
10948 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10949 ) and before or behind it the
10951 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
10954 \begin_layout Standard
10955 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10956 (red arrow in LyX).
10957 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10958 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10961 \begin_layout Standard
10962 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10965 arg "paragraph-break"
10972 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10975 \begin_layout Section
10976 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10977 \begin_inset Index idx
10980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10989 \begin_layout Standard
10990 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10991 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10993 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10994 be broken at the end of a line.
10995 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10999 \begin_layout Subsection
11001 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11003 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
11008 \begin_inset Index idx
11011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11020 \begin_layout Standard
11021 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
11022 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
11023 ) not to break the line at
11025 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
11028 \begin_layout Quote
11029 Further documentation is given in section
11030 \begin_inset Newline newline
11034 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11036 reference "sec:Bibliography"
11043 \begin_layout Standard
11044 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
11045 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11049 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11057 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11059 reference "sec:Bibliography"
11064 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11068 A protected space is set with
11070 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11071 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11073 \begin_inset space ~
11081 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
11087 \begin_layout Subsection
11089 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11091 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11096 \begin_inset Index idx
11099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11100 Spacing ! Horizontal
11108 \begin_layout Standard
11109 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
11111 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11112 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11116 The length units are listed in Appendix
11117 \begin_inset space ~
11121 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11123 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11130 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11132 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11134 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
11139 \begin_inset Index idx
11142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11143 Spaces ! Inter-word
11151 \begin_layout Standard
11152 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
11153 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
11154 at the ends of sentences.
11155 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
11156 automatically takes care about this.
11157 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
11158 followed by a period; see section
11159 \begin_inset space ~
11163 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11165 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
11170 To insert a normal space, select
11172 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11173 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11175 \begin_inset space ~
11183 arg "space-insert normal"
11189 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11191 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11193 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
11198 \begin_inset Index idx
11201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11210 \begin_layout Standard
11212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11219 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
11220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11228 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
11229 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
11230 inside abbreviations:
11233 \begin_layout Quote
11235 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11239 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
11242 \begin_layout Standard
11243 or between values and units.
11244 Compare for example this:
11245 \begin_inset Newline newline
11249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11253 \begin_inset Newline newline
11256 10 kg (normal space
11259 \begin_layout Standard
11260 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
11262 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11263 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11265 \begin_inset space ~
11273 arg "space-insert thin"
11279 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11283 \begin_layout Standard
11284 You can also insert the following space types:
11287 \begin_layout Description
11289 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161965
11291 \begin_inset space ~
11297 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11301 \begin_inset space \medspace{}
11305 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11309 \change_deleted -712698321 1593161991
11311 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161992
11314 space between the arrows.
11315 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162006
11319 \begin_layout Description
11321 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162010
11323 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162011
11327 \begin_inset space ~
11330 space A line with a
11331 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11335 \begin_inset space \thickspace{}
11339 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11343 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162017
11345 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162018
11348 space between the arrows.
11351 \begin_layout Description
11353 \begin_inset space ~
11357 \begin_inset space ~
11360 space A line with a
11361 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11365 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
11369 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11372 negative thin space between the arrows.
11375 \begin_layout Description
11377 \begin_inset space ~
11381 \begin_inset space ~
11384 space A line with a
11385 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11389 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
11393 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11396 negative medium space between the arrows.
11399 \begin_layout Description
11401 \begin_inset space ~
11405 \begin_inset space ~
11408 space A line with a
11409 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11413 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
11417 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11420 negative thick space between the arrows.
11423 \begin_layout Description
11425 \begin_inset space ~
11429 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11433 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11437 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
11441 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11445 \begin_inset space ~
11449 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11452 em) space between the arrows.
11455 \begin_layout Description
11457 \begin_inset space ~
11461 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11465 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11469 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11473 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11477 \begin_inset space ~
11481 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11484 em) space between the arrows.
11487 \begin_layout Description
11489 \begin_inset space ~
11493 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11497 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11501 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11505 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11509 \begin_inset space ~
11513 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11516 em) space between the arrows.
11519 \begin_layout Description
11521 \begin_inset space ~
11525 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11529 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11534 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11538 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11541 cm space between the arrows.
11544 \begin_layout Standard
11546 \begin_inset space ~
11550 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11552 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11556 lists the different space sizes.
11559 \begin_layout Standard
11560 \begin_inset Float table
11567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11568 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11571 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11573 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11577 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11587 \begin_inset Tabular
11588 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="12" columns="2">
11589 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11590 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11591 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11631 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11655 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11679 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11688 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
11689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11694 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11705 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11707 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11716 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
11717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11722 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11733 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11735 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11759 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11763 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11767 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11791 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11815 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11830 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11843 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11858 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11871 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11886 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11899 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11920 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11922 \begin_inset Index idx
11925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11934 \begin_layout Standard
11935 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11936 feature for adding extra space
11937 in a uniform fashion.
11938 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11939 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11940 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11941 equally between themselves.
11944 \begin_layout Standard
11945 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11948 \begin_layout Quote
11950 This is on the left side
11951 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11954 This is on the right
11957 \begin_layout Quote
11960 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11964 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11970 \begin_layout Quote
11973 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11977 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11981 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11987 \begin_layout Standard
11988 That was an example in the
11994 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11998 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12002 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12005 is one in a standard paragraph.
12006 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
12010 sitting in-between the two arrows.
12013 \begin_layout Standard
12014 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
12017 \begin_inset space ~
12022 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
12025 \begin_layout Standard
12027 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
12031 \begin_inset space ~
12037 \begin_layout Standard
12039 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
12043 \begin_inset space ~
12049 \begin_layout Standard
12051 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
12055 \begin_inset space ~
12061 \begin_layout Standard
12063 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
12067 \begin_inset space ~
12073 \begin_layout Standard
12075 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242277
12077 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242278
12081 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242369
12082 (= opened downwards)
12085 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
12089 \begin_inset space ~
12095 \begin_layout Standard
12097 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242281
12099 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242282
12103 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242378
12107 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
12111 \begin_inset space ~
12117 \begin_layout Standard
12118 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12126 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
12130 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
12132 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
12133 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
12137 option in the space dialog.
12145 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12147 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12149 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
12154 \begin_inset Index idx
12157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12166 \begin_layout Standard
12167 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
12168 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
12171 \begin_layout Standard
12172 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
12175 What is correct English?:
12176 \begin_inset Newline newline
12180 \begin_inset Newline newline
12184 \begin_inset space ~
12187 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
12188 \begin_inset Newline newline
12192 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
12195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12203 \begin_inset Newline newline
12207 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
12210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12218 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
12224 \begin_layout Standard
12226 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
12227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12231 \begin_inset space ~
12235 \begin_inset space ~
12239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12243 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
12245 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12246 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12250 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
12252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12256 \begin_inset space ~
12260 \begin_inset space ~
12264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12267 into the phantom inset (note the space after
12268 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12272 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12276 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
12277 That is why it is named
12278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12286 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
12287 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
12291 \begin_layout Subsection
12293 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12295 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
12300 \begin_inset Index idx
12303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12312 \begin_layout Standard
12313 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
12315 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12316 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12318 \begin_inset space ~
12324 There you find the following sizes:
12327 \begin_layout Standard
12340 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
12341 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
12346 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
12348 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12349 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
12351 \begin_inset space ~
12357 \begin_inset Index idx
12360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12361 Document ! Settings
12366 for the paragraph separation.
12367 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
12376 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360527
12380 \begin_layout Standard
12382 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360570
12391 equal to the height, or half the height, of a line in the current font
12392 size including line spacing.
12397 \begin_layout Standard
12403 \begin_inset Index idx
12406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12412 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
12413 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
12418 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
12419 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
12428 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
12432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12437 s are described in section
12438 \begin_inset space ~
12442 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12444 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
12453 If there are several
12457 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
12458 You can therefore use
12462 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
12465 \begin_layout Standard
12470 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
12471 \begin_inset space ~
12475 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12477 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12484 \begin_layout Standard
12485 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12495 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
12496 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
12508 \begin_layout Subsection
12509 Paragraph Alignment
12510 \begin_inset Index idx
12513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12514 Paragraph ! Alignment
12522 \begin_layout Standard
12523 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
12525 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
12528 dialog (toolbar button
12531 arg "layout-paragraph"
12535 There are five possibilities:
12538 \begin_layout Itemize
12546 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
12552 \begin_layout Itemize
12560 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12566 \begin_layout Itemize
12574 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12580 \begin_layout Itemize
12588 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12594 \begin_layout Itemize
12602 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12608 \begin_layout Standard
12609 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12610 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12611 the left and right margins.
12612 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12615 \begin_layout Standard
12617 This paragraph is right aligned,
12620 \begin_layout Standard
12622 this one is centered,
12625 \begin_layout Standard
12627 this one is left aligned.
12630 \begin_layout Subsection
12632 \begin_inset Index idx
12635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12636 Page breaks ! Forced
12642 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12644 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12651 \begin_layout Standard
12652 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12653 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12654 force a page break where you want one.
12655 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12656 is good at page breaking.
12657 Only if you use a lot of
12661 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12662 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12665 \begin_layout Standard
12666 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12667 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12671 have to change the page breaking.
12674 \begin_layout Standard
12675 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12677 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12679 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12680 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12682 \begin_inset space ~
12688 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12690 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12691 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12693 \begin_inset space ~
12698 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12700 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12701 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12704 \begin_layout Standard
12705 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12706 at the top of a page.
12707 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12709 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12710 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12711 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12713 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12715 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12719 to learn more about
12726 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12728 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12730 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12735 \begin_inset Index idx
12738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12739 Page breaks ! Clear
12747 \begin_layout Standard
12748 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12749 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12750 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12751 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12752 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12755 \begin_layout Standard
12756 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12758 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12759 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12761 \begin_inset space ~
12767 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12769 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12770 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12772 \begin_inset space ~
12776 \begin_inset space ~
12781 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12782 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12785 \begin_layout Subsection
12787 \begin_inset Index idx
12790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12797 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12799 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12806 \begin_layout Standard
12807 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12809 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12811 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12812 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12814 \begin_inset space ~
12818 \begin_inset space ~
12826 arg "newline-insert newline"
12830 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12832 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12833 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12835 \begin_inset space ~
12839 \begin_inset space ~
12847 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12850 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12852 This is useful to avoid
12853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12860 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12863 \begin_layout Standard
12864 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12865 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12867 very good at line breaking.
12868 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12869 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12870 \begin_inset space ~
12874 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12876 reference "sec:Quote"
12881 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12883 reference "sec:Verse"
12888 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12890 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12897 \begin_layout Subsection
12899 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12901 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12906 \begin_inset Index idx
12909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12918 \begin_layout Standard
12920 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12931 \begin_layout Standard
12935 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12936 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12938 \begin_inset space ~
12943 you can insert horizontal lines.
12944 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12945 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12946 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12949 \begin_layout Standard
12951 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12962 \begin_layout Section
12963 Characters and Symbols
12966 \begin_layout Standard
12967 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12968 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12969 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12971 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12975 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12977 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12981 for information on how this is done.
12984 \begin_layout Standard
12985 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12990 dialog via the menu
12992 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12993 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12999 \begin_layout Standard
13000 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13008 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
13009 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
13011 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
13019 \begin_layout Section
13020 Fonts and Text Styles
13021 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13023 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
13030 \begin_layout Subsection
13032 \begin_inset Index idx
13035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13044 \begin_layout Standard
13045 There are two types of fonts:
13048 \begin_layout Description
13050 \begin_inset space ~
13054 \begin_inset Index idx
13057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13063 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
13064 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13068 characters) in the font.
13069 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
13070 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
13071 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
13072 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
13073 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
13074 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
13075 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
13076 \begin_inset Newline newline
13079 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
13080 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
13081 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
13082 sizes than at small ones.
13083 \begin_inset Newline newline
13097 \begin_inset space ~
13105 \begin_layout Description
13107 \begin_inset space ~
13111 \begin_inset Index idx
13114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13120 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
13121 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
13122 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
13123 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
13124 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
13125 image manipulation program.
13126 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
13127 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
13128 \begin_inset space ~
13131 pixels high up to 34
13132 \begin_inset space ~
13135 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
13136 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
13137 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
13139 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
13140 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
13141 \begin_inset Newline newline
13144 Bitmap fonts are named
13147 \begin_inset space ~
13152 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
13155 \begin_layout Standard
13156 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
13157 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
13158 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
13159 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
13160 use scalable fonts.
13163 \begin_layout Standard
13164 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
13167 \begin_layout Standard
13168 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
13170 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
13172 \change_inserted 5863208 1598184810
13175 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
13176 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
13177 font to emphasize text, you use an
13178 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13182 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13186 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
13188 In \SpecialChar LyX
13189 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
13193 \begin_layout Subsection
13196 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13198 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
13205 \begin_layout Standard
13206 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
13207 used its own fonts.
13208 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
13209 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13212 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
13213 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
13214 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
13215 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
13216 to a word processor.
13217 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
13218 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
13219 files are very portable across
13220 different machines.
13221 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
13222 has increased a lot
13223 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
13226 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
13228 \begin_inset space ~
13232 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13234 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
13239 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
13240 code in the document
13241 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
13244 \begin_layout Standard
13245 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
13246 engines that are also able directly
13247 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
13249 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
13251 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
13253 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
13254 that is installed on your system.
13255 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
13258 \begin_layout Standard
13259 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13267 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
13268 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
13276 \begin_layout Subsection
13277 Document Font and Font size
13278 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13280 name "subsec:Document-Font"
13285 \begin_inset Index idx
13288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13295 \begin_inset Index idx
13298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13307 \begin_layout Standard
13308 You can set the document fonts in the
13310 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13314 \begin_inset Index idx
13317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13318 Document ! Settings
13328 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
13329 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
13332 \begin_inset space ~
13341 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
13343 \begin_inset space ~
13346 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
13349 \begin_layout Standard
13354 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
13355 This requires that you use
13367 as the output format, i.
13368 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13372 \begin_inset space \space{}
13375 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
13376 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
13377 installed (see section
13378 \begin_inset space ~
13382 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13384 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
13389 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
13391 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
13392 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
13394 \begin_inset space ~
13397 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
13398 cannot determine the family.
13399 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
13400 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
13403 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
13406 \begin_layout Standard
13407 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
13408 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
13413 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13419 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
13421 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
13423 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
13426 font encoding, this is
13427 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
13428 , depending on the document language,
13431 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
13432 either the the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13434 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13440 \begin_inset space ~
13446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13456 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
13457 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13465 \begin_inset space ~
13471 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13479 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
13483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13491 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13500 European Computer Modern
13503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13511 However, some classes set different default fonts.
13514 \begin_layout Standard
13519 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
13520 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
13524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13525 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
13528 \begin_inset space ~
13533 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
13539 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
13540 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
13543 \begin_layout Itemize
13547 \begin_inset space ~
13552 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
13565 \begin_inset space ~
13570 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13571 community in order to replace
13575 as the default font.
13576 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
13577 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
13580 \begin_inset space ~
13593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13594 One difference is improved kerning.
13602 \begin_layout Itemize
13603 If you do not like the look of
13611 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13612 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13616 \begin_inset space ~
13622 \begin_inset space ~
13632 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13633 \begin_inset space ~
13636 serif and typewriter fonts,
13640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13641 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13642 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13648 \begin_inset space ~
13657 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13658 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13662 \begin_inset space \space{}
13670 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13674 \begin_inset space \space{}
13680 \begin_inset space ~
13688 \begin_inset space ~
13698 but you can also select your own.
13699 \begin_inset Newline newline
13702 The differences between roman,
13705 \begin_inset space ~
13714 fonts are explained in section
13715 \begin_inset space ~
13719 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13721 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13726 \begin_inset Newline newline
13732 \begin_inset space ~
13737 was originally designed for newspapers.
13738 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13739 into the small newspaper columns.
13743 \begin_inset space ~
13748 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13751 \begin_layout Standard
13752 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13765 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13770 depends on the class you are using.
13771 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13774 \begin_layout Standard
13775 Note that the font size is the
13780 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13781 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13782 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13783 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13786 \begin_inset space ~
13792 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13793 \begin_inset space ~
13797 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13799 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13806 \begin_layout Standard
13810 \begin_inset space ~
13815 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13817 \begin_inset space ~
13820 serif or typewriter.
13825 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13835 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13838 \begin_layout Standard
13843 LaTeX font encoding
13845 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13846 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13852 \begin_inset Index idx
13855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13863 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
13865 \begin_inset space ~
13869 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13871 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13878 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13879 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13880 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
13884 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
13892 \begin_layout Standard
13893 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13895 Use Old Style Figures
13899 Use True Small Caps
13902 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13905 Use Old Style Figures
13907 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13909 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13910 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13914 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13917 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13921 Use True Small Caps
13923 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13924 of scaled capitals.
13925 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13926 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13927 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000270
13931 \begin_layout Standard
13933 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000448
13934 Furthermore, with some fonts, you can add additional (comma-separated) options
13935 provided by the font package (or the
13939 package, if you use non-TeX fonts), into the
13944 This presupposes that you are familiar with the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
13950 \begin_layout Standard
13955 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13956 a font to display the script characters.
13960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13961 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13967 \begin_inset Index idx
13970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13977 So this has no effect for the document language
13993 \begin_layout Standard
13996 Enable micro-typographic extensions
13998 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
13999 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14005 \begin_inset Index idx
14008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14010 packages ! microtype
14019 \begin_layout Standard
14022 Disallow line breaks after dashes
14024 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
14028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14029 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14030 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14036 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
14037 \begin_inset space ~
14041 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14043 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
14053 \begin_layout Standard
14054 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
14058 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14066 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
14071 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
14072 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
14074 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
14076 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
14079 dialog, see section
14080 \begin_inset space ~
14084 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14086 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
14098 \begin_layout Subsection
14102 \begin_layout Standard
14103 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
14104 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
14106 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
14107 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
14108 choose a math font in the dialog
14110 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14114 \begin_inset Index idx
14117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14118 Document ! Settings
14124 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
14125 automatically selects a math font.
14126 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
14127 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
14130 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14136 \begin_inset space ~
14142 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14147 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
14148 document font is available.
14151 \begin_layout Standard
14152 Note that the math font will not be used for
14156 (which is inserted with the shortcut
14162 or by the insertion of the command
14169 Also note that some math fonts are sans
14170 \begin_inset space ~
14174 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
14175 while the math characters do not.
14177 \begin_inset space ~
14180 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
14183 \begin_inset space ~
14191 \begin_inset space ~
14196 in the document font settings.
14199 \begin_layout Standard
14200 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
14201 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
14202 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
14203 font (in most cases
14204 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14210 \begin_inset space ~
14216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14219 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
14220 variant of the document's class default font (in most
14222 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14228 \begin_inset space ~
14234 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14240 \begin_layout Subsection
14242 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
14244 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
14248 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
14250 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14252 name "subsec:charstyles"
14259 \begin_inset Index idx
14262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14269 \begin_inset Index idx
14272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14281 \begin_layout Standard
14282 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
14283 automatically changes the
14284 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
14287 style for certain paragraph environments.
14289 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
14290 In this section, we will explain how the style of selected text passages
14292 This is where we meet the concept of
14298 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
14300 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
14304 \begin_layout Standard
14306 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
14311 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
14313 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
14326 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
14332 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14335 e., available with all document classes.
14336 On top of that, some document classes and modules provide
14340 for specific purposes.
14341 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
14344 \begin_layout Standard
14346 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
14347 Before we do that, though, allow us just a few words of what we mean by
14357 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
14361 : if you wanted to emphasize a word, you selected it and chose e.
14362 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14374 — you customized the
14379 Modern processors, \SpecialChar LyX
14380 among them, encourage the use of
14392 instead (although formal markup is still possible; see section
14393 \begin_inset space ~
14397 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14399 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14404 Rather than fiddling with
14408 , they encourage the use of
14412 , who are defined with regard to their function (e.
14413 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14417 \begin_inset Quotes els
14421 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14424 ), not their form (
14425 \begin_inset Quotes els
14429 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14433 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
14434 To begin with, using functional categories keeps you thinking about why
14435 you are actually marking up, if your markup is consistent and systematic,
14436 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
14437 On a more practical level, it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
14438 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names
14444 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
14445 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14448 g., in normal font, or ALL-CAPS), you would have to change any single occurrence.
14449 With a semantic markup (such as
14453 ; see below), you'd just need to change the definition of
14458 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14460 Moreover, semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions
14461 of a document, using different markup semantics.
14464 \begin_layout Standard
14466 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
14467 With that in mind, we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided
14468 by \SpecialChar LyX
14474 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14476 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
14477 Builtin Text Styles
14478 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14480 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
14487 \begin_layout Standard
14489 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
14490 The two builtin text styles can be
14491 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
14495 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
14499 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
14500 both of these styles
14503 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
14511 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
14517 \begin_layout Standard
14522 style, do one of the following:
14525 \begin_layout Itemize
14526 click on the toolbar button
14535 \begin_layout Itemize
14536 use the key binding
14543 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
14547 \begin_layout Itemize
14549 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
14557 arg "dialog-show character"
14563 arg "dialog-show character"
14566 ) as described in section
14567 \begin_inset space ~
14571 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14573 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14582 \begin_layout Standard
14583 These commands are all toggles.
14588 style is already active, they deactivate it.
14591 \begin_layout Standard
14592 One typically uses the
14596 style for proper names.
14598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14605 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
14607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14611 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
14615 \begin_layout Standard
14617 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
14622 is producing text in
14626 , but the definition can be changed.
14631 \begin_layout Standard
14633 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
14635 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
14643 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
14650 \begin_layout Itemize
14651 clicking on the toolbar button
14660 \begin_layout Itemize
14661 using the keybindings
14668 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
14672 \begin_layout Itemize
14674 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
14682 arg "dialog-show character"
14688 arg "dialog-show character"
14691 ) as described in section
14692 \begin_inset space ~
14696 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14698 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14707 \begin_layout Standard
14712 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14714 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
14716 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
14719 packages use a different font
14720 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
14721 , and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14727 \begin_layout Standard
14728 We've been using the
14732 style all over the place in this document.
14733 Here's one more example:
14736 \begin_layout Quotation
14740 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
14742 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
14748 \begin_layout Standard
14749 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
14750 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
14751 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
14752 the common tendency to overuse
14753 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
14755 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
14760 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186598
14762 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
14766 \begin_layout Standard
14768 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
14769 In contrast to the custom text styles, the builtin styles are represented
14770 only as font changes and integrated in the
14778 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
14781 always reset to the default font using the key binding
14788 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
14790 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
14794 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
14797 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14799 \begin_inset space ~
14802 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14804 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598544
14810 arg "dialog-show character"
14816 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
14818 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
14824 arg "dialog-show character"
14828 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596575
14832 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14834 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
14836 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14838 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
14845 \begin_layout Standard
14847 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
14848 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class, a module (see
14850 \begin_inset space ~
14854 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14856 reference "subsec:Modules"
14863 ), or local layout settings (see section
14864 \begin_inset space ~
14868 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14870 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
14875 As the two builtin styles, they provide
14879 markup for specific functions.
14880 For instance, \SpecialChar LyX
14885 module that provides, among other things, some custom text styles to markup
14895 \begin_inset Quotes els
14899 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14905 \begin_layout Standard
14907 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
14908 These styles can be found, if available, in the
14910 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14916 \begin_layout Standard
14918 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
14919 For the purpose of demonstration, we have loaded in this document the optional
14924 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
14925 By example of the emphasized style, we can see the differences in look
14926 and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same): while
14931 appears as normal font change, the custom text style
14932 \begin_inset Flex Emph
14935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14937 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
14945 appears as an inset, with a label below that identifies its semantics.
14946 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
14947 For instance, the three others from the module we have loaded are:
14948 \begin_inset Flex Code
14951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14953 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
14962 \begin_inset Flex Strong
14965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14967 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
14976 \begin_inset Flex Noun
14979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14981 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
14990 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate
14991 on screen their formal appearance.
14996 \begin_layout Subsection
14998 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
15000 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
15004 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
15010 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
15012 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
15018 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
15020 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
15024 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15026 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15031 \begin_inset Index idx
15034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15043 \begin_layout Standard
15044 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
15045 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
15048 fine-tuning; so \SpecialChar LyX
15050 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
15052 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
15056 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
15057 the properties of text passages
15058 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
15062 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
15063 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
15064 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
15065 from ordinary dialog.
15066 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
15070 \begin_layout Standard
15072 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
15073 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module
15074 for this purpose (which is, as written above, generally the better way
15075 of handling such issues), you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak
15076 the properties of the respective text passages.
15081 comes in as a last resort.
15086 \begin_layout Standard
15087 Before we document how to
15088 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
15089 use custom character style
15090 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
15091 tweak the text properties
15093 , we want to issue a warning yet again: Don't overuse
15094 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
15096 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
15100 \begin_inset Newline newline
15103 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
15104 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
15107 \begin_layout Standard
15109 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
15110 use custom character styles
15111 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
15112 tweak text properties
15115 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
15118 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15120 \begin_inset space ~
15123 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
15125 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599762
15131 arg "dialog-show character"
15136 dialog or press the toolbar button
15139 arg "dialog-show character"
15144 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
15147 boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
15148 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
15150 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
15153 property that you can choose.
15154 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
15157 \begin_inset space ~
15162 , which keeps the current state of that property.
15164 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
15168 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
15170 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
15175 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
15176 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
15177 environments all at once.
15180 \begin_layout Standard
15182 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
15184 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
15187 properties, and their options (in addition to
15190 \begin_inset space ~
15196 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
15200 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
15208 \begin_layout Labeling
15209 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15223 The possible options are:
15227 \begin_layout Labeling
15228 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15233 This is the Roman font family.
15234 Normally a serif font.
15235 It's also the default family.
15245 \begin_layout Labeling
15246 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15250 \begin_inset space ~
15257 This is the Sans Serif font family.
15269 \begin_layout Labeling
15270 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15277 This is the Typewriter font family.
15283 arg "font-typewriter"
15289 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
15293 \begin_layout Standard
15295 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
15296 The general differences of these families are:
15299 \begin_layout Itemize
15301 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
15306 fonts use characters with serifs.
15307 These are the small
15308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15312 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15315 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15316 The following example shows the difference:
15317 \begin_inset Newline newline
15321 \begin_inset Newline newline
15326 text without serifs
15329 \begin_inset Newline newline
15332 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15333 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15340 \begin_layout Itemize
15342 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15347 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15348 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15349 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15352 \begin_layout Itemize
15354 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15367 font, which means every character has the same width; the
15368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15380 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15385 \begin_inset Newline newline
15389 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
15392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15394 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15407 \begin_inset Note Note
15410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15412 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15413 For more on phantoms see section
15414 \begin_inset space ~
15418 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15420 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15430 \begin_inset Newline newline
15439 \begin_layout Labeling
15440 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15445 This corresponds to the print weight.
15450 \begin_layout Labeling
15451 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15456 This is the Medium font series.
15457 It's also the default series.
15460 \begin_layout Labeling
15461 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15468 This is the Bold font series.
15481 \begin_layout Labeling
15482 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15487 As the name implies.
15492 \begin_layout Labeling
15493 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15498 This is the Upright font shape.
15499 It's also the default shape.
15502 \begin_layout Labeling
15503 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15513 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
15518 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
15523 s the Italic font shape
15529 \begin_layout Labeling
15530 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15537 This is the Slanted font shape
15539 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
15540 , this is different from italic).
15543 \begin_layout Labeling
15544 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15548 \begin_inset space ~
15555 This is the Small caps font shape
15562 \begin_layout Labeling
15563 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15568 Alters the text color.
15569 Note that not all DVI
15570 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599925
15572 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
15575 viewers are able to display colors.
15577 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599934
15581 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
15583 \begin_inset space ~
15590 , which means that the document default color set in
15592 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15593 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15599 \begin_inset space ~
15605 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
15607 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599960
15611 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
15691 \begin_inset Index idx
15694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15701 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186626
15707 \begin_layout Labeling
15708 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15713 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
15714 the language of the document.
15715 Text marked in this way will be underlined
15716 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600006
15717 in the \SpecialChar LyX
15720 in blue to indicate the change
15721 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
15722 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
15726 \begin_inset Newline newline
15729 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
15731 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
15732 When using the spell checking (see section
15733 \begin_inset space ~
15737 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15739 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
15743 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
15744 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
15746 \begin_inset Newline newline
15749 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
15751 Exclude from Spellchecking
15754 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
15757 \begin_layout Labeling
15758 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15763 Alters the size of the font.
15765 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
15767 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
15771 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
15774 numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportional to the
15775 document font size.
15776 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
15777 the details, but a general description of what
15783 \begin_layout Labeling
15784 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15805 arg "font-size tiny"
15811 \begin_layout Labeling
15812 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15833 arg "font-size scriptsize"
15839 \begin_layout Labeling
15840 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15848 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15852 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15861 arg "font-size footnotesize"
15867 \begin_layout Labeling
15868 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15889 arg "font-size small"
15895 \begin_layout Labeling
15896 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15910 It's also the default size.
15914 arg "font-size normal"
15920 \begin_layout Labeling
15921 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15942 arg "font-size large"
15948 \begin_layout Labeling
15949 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15970 arg "font-size larger"
15976 \begin_layout Labeling
15977 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15998 arg "font-size largest"
16004 \begin_layout Labeling
16005 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16013 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16017 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16026 arg "font-size huge"
16032 \begin_layout Labeling
16033 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16041 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16054 arg "font-size giant"
16060 \begin_layout Labeling
16061 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16066 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
16067 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16075 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16079 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16086 arg "font-size increase"
16092 \begin_layout Labeling
16093 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16098 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
16099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16118 arg "font-size decrease"
16125 \begin_layout Standard
16130 : don't go crazy with this feature.
16131 You should almost never need to change the font size.
16133 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
16134 — use those instead.
16135 This is here for fine-tuning only!
16138 \begin_layout Labeling
16139 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16141 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
16145 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
16151 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
16152 change a few other things at the character level
16153 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
16154 have text passages being underlined
16158 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
16159 Avoid using underlining if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter
16160 days, when you could not change fonts.
16161 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
16162 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
16163 because some people
16167 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
16174 \begin_layout Labeling
16175 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16177 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
16184 This is text with emphasize on
16187 This might seem like the same as
16191 , but it is actually a bit different.
16197 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
16199 Normally this font is equal to italic.
16200 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
16204 \begin_layout Labeling
16205 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16207 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
16212 Don't use underlining.
16217 \begin_layout Labeling
16218 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16220 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
16224 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
16232 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
16234 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
16243 arg "font-underline"
16249 \begin_inset Newline newline
16253 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
16256 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
16257 when you could not change fonts.
16258 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
16259 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
16260 because some people
16264 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
16269 \begin_layout Labeling
16270 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16274 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
16276 \begin_inset space ~
16285 This is text with Double under
16286 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
16288 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
16297 arg "font-underunderline"
16301 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
16303 \begin_inset Newline newline
16306 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
16307 about double underbar
16312 \begin_layout Labeling
16313 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16317 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
16319 \begin_inset space ~
16328 This is text with Wavy under
16329 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
16331 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
16340 arg "font-underwave"
16344 \begin_inset Newline newline
16347 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
16348 Keep antinausea pills handy.
16349 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
16354 \begin_layout Labeling
16355 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16357 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
16362 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
16368 \begin_layout Labeling
16369 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16371 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
16376 Don't use strikethrough.
16379 \begin_layout Labeling
16380 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16384 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
16386 \begin_inset space ~
16390 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
16398 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
16400 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
16401 Single strikethrough
16409 arg "font-strikeout"
16413 \begin_inset Newline newline
16416 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
16417 changed in the meantime.
16420 \begin_layout Labeling
16421 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16423 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
16427 \begin_inset space ~
16431 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
16433 \begin_inset space ~
16437 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
16445 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
16447 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
16453 \begin_inset Newline newline
16456 This is used to make text hardly readable.
16460 \begin_layout Standard
16462 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
16463 In addition to all the formal markup described above, the dialog also provides
16464 you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
16465 \begin_inset space ~
16469 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16471 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
16478 \begin_layout Itemize
16480 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
16487 This is text with emphasize on
16492 \begin_layout Itemize
16496 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
16503 This is text with Noun on.
16505 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
16512 , this is a logical attribute.
16513 Normally it's equivalent to
16516 \begin_inset space ~
16526 \begin_layout Standard
16527 So you have a huge number of combinations to
16528 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
16530 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
16535 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
16536 chosen a new character style
16537 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
16538 applied a text property
16541 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
16544 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
16546 \begin_inset space ~
16549 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
16551 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600703
16557 arg "dialog-show character"
16565 arg "dialog-show character"
16568 ) dialog, the settings are
16569 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
16573 You can activate the
16574 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
16576 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
16577 last applied properties
16579 by using the toolbar button
16582 arg "textstyle-apply"
16586 The button lets you apply
16587 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
16588 your custom character style
16589 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
16592 even when the dialog isn't visible.
16594 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905101
16595 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again, a press
16596 on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
16597 20) most recently applied settings, from which you can select one.
16602 \begin_layout Standard
16603 To completely reset the
16604 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
16606 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
16607 text properties of a selection
16609 to the default, use
16610 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917704
16612 \change_deleted -712698321 1545917700
16622 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917733
16627 from the menu of the toolbar button
16630 arg "textstyle-apply"
16637 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
16638 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose
16639 you just set the shape to
16640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16658 \begin_inset space ~
16672 \begin_layout Standard
16674 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16675 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
16683 \begin_inset space ~
16695 \begin_layout Itemize
16697 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16703 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16707 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16710 font, which means every character has the same width; the
16711 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16723 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16728 \begin_inset Newline newline
16732 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
16735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16746 \begin_inset Note Note
16749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16750 For more on phantoms see section
16751 \begin_inset space ~
16755 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16757 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
16767 \begin_inset Newline newline
16773 \begin_layout Itemize
16775 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16780 fonts use characters with serifs.
16781 These are the small
16782 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16786 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16789 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
16790 The following example shows the difference:
16791 \begin_inset Newline newline
16795 \begin_inset Newline newline
16800 text without serifs
16803 \begin_inset Newline newline
16806 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
16807 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
16814 \begin_layout Itemize
16816 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16821 is not recommended for use as a base type.
16822 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
16823 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
16828 \begin_layout Standard
16830 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
16831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16838 refers to applying or removing font properties.
16839 When a property is marked for toggling in the
16842 \begin_inset space ~
16847 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
16848 the property to be removed.
16849 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
16850 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
16851 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
16854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16869 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
16870 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
16871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16875 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16878 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
16882 \begin_inset space ~
16887 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
16890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16898 If you, for example, set
16899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16907 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16911 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16917 \begin_inset space ~
16922 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
16924 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16928 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16931 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
16936 \begin_layout Standard
16938 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
16941 with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts! They are, more
16942 often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
16945 \begin_layout Section
16946 Printing and Previewing
16949 \begin_layout Subsection
16953 \begin_layout Standard
16954 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
16955 using \SpecialChar LyX
16956 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
16957 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
16958 goes on behind-the-scenes.
16959 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
16961 Additional Features
16966 \begin_layout Standard
16968 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
16971 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
16972 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
16973 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16976 is what you use to do your actual writing.
16977 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
16978 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16979 to turn your writing into printable output.
16980 This happens in two stages:
16983 \begin_layout Enumerate
16984 First, \SpecialChar LyX
16985 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
16987 a file with the extension,
16988 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16996 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17002 \begin_layout Enumerate
17003 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
17004 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17005 to use the commands in the
17009 file to produce printable output.
17012 \begin_layout Subsection
17013 Output file formats
17014 \begin_inset Index idx
17017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17024 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17026 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
17033 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17034 Simple text (ASCII)
17035 \begin_inset Index idx
17038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17039 File formats ! ASCII
17047 \begin_layout Standard
17048 This file type has the extension
17049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17061 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
17062 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17065 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
17066 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17072 \begin_layout Standard
17073 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
17075 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17076 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17078 \begin_inset space ~
17084 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
17085 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
17086 bibliography (section
17087 \begin_inset space ~
17091 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17093 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
17098 If your document includes such material, use
17100 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17101 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17103 \begin_inset space ~
17107 \begin_inset space ~
17111 \begin_inset space ~
17119 \begin_inset space ~
17123 \begin_inset space ~
17129 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
17130 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
17133 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17136 \begin_inset Index idx
17139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17140 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
17149 \begin_layout Standard
17150 This file type has the extension
17151 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17162 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17165 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
17166 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
17167 -Errors or to process it manually
17168 with console commands.
17169 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
17170 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
17171 's temporary directory whenever you
17172 view or export your document.
17175 \begin_layout Standard
17176 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17177 -file using the menu
17179 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17180 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17184 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
17185 export variants are explained in section
17186 \begin_inset space ~
17190 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17192 reference "subsec:Export"
17199 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17201 \begin_inset Index idx
17204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17213 \begin_layout Standard
17214 This file type has the extension
17215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17223 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17235 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
17236 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
17237 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
17241 \begin_layout Standard
17242 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
17243 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
17244 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
17245 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
17246 when you view the DVI.
17247 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
17250 \begin_layout Standard
17251 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
17253 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17254 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17259 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17260 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17262 \begin_inset space ~
17268 The latter option uses the program
17270 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17276 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17279 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17280 font access (see section
17281 \begin_inset space ~
17285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17287 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17292 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17293 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17298 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17300 \begin_inset Index idx
17303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17304 File formats ! PostScript
17312 \begin_layout Standard
17313 This file type has the extension
17314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17326 PostScript was developed by the company
17330 as a printer language.
17331 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
17333 PostScript can be seen as a
17334 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17337 programming language
17338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17341 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
17345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17346 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17353 \begin_inset Index idx
17356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17358 packages ! pstricks
17368 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
17371 \begin_layout Standard
17372 PostScript can only contain images in the format
17373 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17376 Encapsulated PostScript
17377 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17380 (EPS, file extension
17381 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17389 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17393 As \SpecialChar LyX
17394 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
17395 convert them in the background to EPS.
17396 If, for example, you have 50
17397 \begin_inset space ~
17400 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
17402 \begin_inset space ~
17405 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
17406 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
17408 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
17409 EPS to avoid this problem.
17412 \begin_layout Standard
17413 You can export to PostScript using the menu
17415 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17416 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17422 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17424 \begin_inset Index idx
17427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17434 \begin_inset Index idx
17437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17446 \begin_layout Standard
17447 This file type has the extension
17448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17456 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17464 Portable Document Format
17465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17472 was derived from PostScript.
17473 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
17475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17482 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
17483 looks exactly the same.
17486 \begin_layout Standard
17487 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
17488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17491 Joint Photographic Experts Group
17492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17495 (JPG, file extension
17496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17504 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17523 Portable Network Graphics
17524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17527 (PNG, file extension
17528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17540 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
17541 converts them in the
17542 background to one of these formats.
17543 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
17544 will slow down your workflow.
17545 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
17548 \begin_layout Standard
17549 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
17551 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17557 \begin_layout Description
17559 \begin_inset space ~
17562 (pdflatex) This uses the program
17566 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17569 \begin_layout Description
17571 \begin_inset space ~
17578 ) This uses the program
17580 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17583 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17586 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17589 is a new engine, derived from
17593 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
17594 access (see section
17595 \begin_inset space ~
17599 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17601 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17606 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17607 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17612 \begin_layout Description
17614 \begin_inset space ~
17621 ) This uses the program
17626 that converts your file directly to PDF.
17632 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17633 font access (see section
17634 \begin_inset space ~
17638 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17640 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17645 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
17646 vertically written Japanese.
17649 \begin_layout Description
17651 \begin_inset space ~
17654 (cropped) This is the same as
17657 \begin_inset space ~
17662 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
17663 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
17664 to generate good-looking
17665 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
17668 \begin_layout Description
17670 \begin_inset space ~
17673 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
17677 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
17681 \begin_layout Description
17683 \begin_inset space ~
17686 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
17690 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
17691 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
17695 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
17696 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
17699 \begin_layout Standard
17703 \begin_inset space ~
17712 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
17713 works without problems.
17714 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
17715 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
17719 \begin_inset space ~
17727 \begin_inset space ~
17732 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
17740 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17742 \begin_inset Index idx
17745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17746 FileFormats ! XHTML
17752 \begin_inset Index idx
17755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17764 \begin_layout Standard
17765 This file type has the extension
17766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17778 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
17779 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
17780 When \SpecialChar LyX
17781 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
17782 suitable for the purpose.
17783 For the math output you can choose in the menu
17785 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17786 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17789 between different formats, which are described in section
17791 Math Output in XHTML
17796 \begin_inset space ~
17804 \begin_layout Standard
17805 XHTML output remains
17806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17813 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
17814 features are supported yet.
17818 and the World Wide Web
17822 Additional Features
17824 manual, for more information.
17827 \begin_layout Standard
17828 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
17830 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17831 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17837 \begin_layout Subsection
17839 \begin_inset Index idx
17842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17851 \begin_layout Standard
17852 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
17853 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
17862 or use the toolbar button
17869 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
17870 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
17871 \begin_inset space ~
17875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17877 reference "sec:File-Formats"
17881 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
17883 \begin_inset space ~
17887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17889 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
17894 Further output formats can be selected via
17896 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17897 View (Other Formats)
17899 or the toolbar button
17908 \begin_layout Standard
17909 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
17910 viewer window using the menu
17912 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17917 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17918 Update (Other Formats)
17923 \begin_layout Standard
17924 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
17927 To have a real output, export your document.
17930 \begin_layout Section
17931 A few Words about Typography
17932 \begin_inset Index idx
17935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17944 \begin_layout Subsection
17945 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
17946 \begin_inset Index idx
17949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17956 \begin_inset Index idx
17959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17968 \begin_layout Standard
17969 In \SpecialChar LyX
17971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17982 symbol comes in four variants: the
17999 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
18005 \begin_layout Standard
18006 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18016 height_special "totalheight"
18021 backgroundcolor "none"
18024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18025 \begin_inset Tabular
18026 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
18027 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18028 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18029 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18030 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18031 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18032 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18060 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18061 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18100 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18101 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18123 system key combination
18127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18128 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
18131 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18135 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18140 and the em dash with
18143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18156 is the Mac label for the right
18166 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18170 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18179 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18180 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18202 system key combination or
18203 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18207 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18217 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18230 \begin_inset Formula $-$
18238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18250 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18269 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
18275 \begin_layout Standard
18276 Dashes can also be inserted with
18278 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18280 \begin_inset space ~
18283 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
18291 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
18292 and 2014 for the en dash).
18295 \begin_layout Standard
18296 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
18297 mode and has a length of its own.
18298 Here are some examples:
18301 \begin_layout Enumerate
18302 line- and page-breaks
18303 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18313 \begin_layout Enumerate
18315 \begin_inset space ~
18319 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18329 \begin_layout Enumerate
18330 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
18331 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18341 \begin_layout Enumerate
18342 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
18346 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18356 \begin_layout Standard
18358 \begin_inset CommandInset href
18360 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
18361 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
18369 \begin_layout Subsection
18370 Dashes and Line Breaks
18371 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18373 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
18380 \begin_layout Standard
18381 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
18382 case and locale, e.
18383 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18389 \begin_layout Itemize
18390 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
18391 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
18394 \begin_layout Itemize
18395 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
18399 \begin_layout Itemize
18400 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
18401 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
18404 \begin_layout Standard
18405 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
18406 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18408 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18412 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18417 allows line breaks after hyphens
18418 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782973
18420 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782983
18423 en-dashes and em-dashes.
18426 \begin_layout Enumerate
18427 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
18428 \begin_inset space ~
18431 – common in British English and generally recommended by
18433 The Elements of Typographic Style
18436 \begin_inset space ~
18439 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
18442 \begin_layout Enumerate
18443 Unwanted line breaks
18448 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782702
18450 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782715
18453 be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
18457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18460 Prevent Hyphenation
18465 \begin_inset space ~
18481 in \SpecialChar TeX
18483 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
18484 , a protected space does not suffice
18488 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782332
18493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18495 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782431
18496 It is generally recommended to set the correct language for text parts not
18497 in the document language.
18498 We don't do this here to prevent a dependency on LaTeX support for French
18512 \begin_layout Itemize
18514 \begin_inset space ~
18518 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18528 height_special "totalheight"
18533 backgroundcolor "none"
18536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18545 \begin_layout Itemize
18547 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18557 height_special "totalheight"
18562 backgroundcolor "none"
18565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18567 \begin_inset space ~
18575 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18576 \begin_inset space ~
18579 – sont très utiles.
18582 \begin_layout Itemize
18587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18596 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
18600 \begin_layout Standard
18601 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
18602 \begin_inset space ~
18605 – in contrast to an overfull line
18606 \begin_inset space ~
18609 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18613 \begin_layout Standard
18614 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
18617 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18618 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18619 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18620 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18625 \begin_layout Enumerate
18626 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
18627 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox
18628 or \SpecialChar TeX
18634 \begin_layout Itemize
18636 \begin_inset space ~
18639 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18640 \begin_inset space ~
18643 – sont très utiles.
18647 \begin_layout Enumerate
18648 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
18649 \begin_inset Newline newline
18654 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18655 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18657 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913043
18659 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913043
18661 \begin_inset space ~
18667 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913068
18669 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913068
18671 \begin_inset space ~
18682 \begin_layout Itemize
18683 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18684 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18685 should be followed by
18686 a line break opportunity.
18689 \begin_layout Standard
18690 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
18691 \begin_inset space ~
18695 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18697 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18708 \begin_layout Enumerate
18709 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18710 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
18711 or en dashes (see section
18712 \begin_inset space ~
18716 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18718 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18728 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18729 Changes and backwards compatibility
18732 \begin_layout Standard
18733 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
18735 \begin_inset space ~
18738 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
18739 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
18741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18748 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
18749 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
18757 \begin_layout Standard
18758 Since \SpecialChar LyX
18760 \begin_inset space ~
18763 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18765 prevents ligation to dashes.
18767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18774 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
18779 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
18780 after the input (unless the current text font is
18788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18789 The behavior was changed since
18790 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18794 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18798 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18805 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
18806 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
18807 as non-breakable dashes.
18808 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
18816 \begin_layout Standard
18819 \begin_inset space ~
18827 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
18829 \begin_inset space ~
18832 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
18835 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18836 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18837 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18838 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18840 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
18844 If you used both literal and
18845 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18852 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
18854 \begin_inset space ~
18857 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
18858 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
18861 \begin_layout Subsection
18863 \begin_inset Index idx
18866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18873 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18875 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
18882 \begin_layout Standard
18883 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
18884 but automatically in the output.
18885 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18891 \begin_inset Index idx
18894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18901 following the rules of the document language.
18903 does not hyphenate text in the
18907 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
18910 \begin_layout Standard
18912 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
18916 font and with unusual constructs, like
18917 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18921 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18925 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
18926 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
18927 This is done with the menu
18929 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18930 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18932 \begin_inset space ~
18938 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18940 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18944 \begin_layout Standard
18945 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
18946 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
18948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18957 would then see the hyphen
18958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18965 as a line break possibility.
18966 A line break at this point would look ugly.
18967 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a protected hyphen
18970 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18971 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18974 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
18976 Prevent Hyphenation
18981 \begin_inset space ~
18989 \begin_layout Subsection
18991 \begin_inset Index idx
18994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19003 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19004 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
19005 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19007 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
19014 \begin_layout Standard
19015 When \SpecialChar LyX
19016 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
19017 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
19019 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
19022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19025 appropriate amount of space.
19026 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19029 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
19031 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
19032 gets after another word.
19035 \begin_layout Standard
19036 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
19037 not work in all cases.
19039 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19050 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
19051 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
19054 \begin_layout Standard
19055 Here are some examples of
19059 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
19062 \begin_layout Itemize
19067 \begin_layout Itemize
19072 \begin_layout Standard
19073 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
19076 \begin_layout Itemize
19078 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19082 this is too much space!
19085 \begin_layout Itemize
19090 \begin_layout Standard
19091 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
19094 \begin_layout Standard
19095 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
19098 \begin_layout Enumerate
19102 \begin_inset space ~
19107 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
19108 \begin_inset space ~
19112 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19114 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
19119 \begin_inset Index idx
19122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19123 Spaces ! inter-word
19131 \begin_layout Enumerate
19135 \begin_inset space ~
19140 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
19141 \begin_inset space ~
19145 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19147 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
19152 \begin_inset Index idx
19155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19164 \begin_layout Enumerate
19168 \begin_inset space ~
19172 \begin_inset space ~
19176 \begin_inset space ~
19183 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19185 \begin_inset space ~
19190 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
19191 This function is also bound to
19194 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
19200 \begin_layout Standard
19201 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
19204 \begin_layout Itemize
19206 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19210 \begin_inset space \space{}
19213 this is too much space!
19216 \begin_layout Itemize
19217 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
19221 \begin_layout Standard
19222 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
19223 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
19225 will take care of this.
19228 \begin_layout Standard
19229 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
19233 \begin_inset space ~
19239 feature described in the section
19241 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
19246 Additional Features
19251 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19253 \begin_inset Index idx
19256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19257 Typography ! Quotation marks
19263 \begin_inset Index idx
19266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19267 Quotation marks | see
19271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19297 \begin_layout Standard
19299 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
19300 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
19301 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
19303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19311 The keyboard character,
19315 , generates this automatically.
19318 \begin_layout Standard
19319 You can specify what character the
19323 key produces by using the submenu
19329 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19333 \begin_inset Index idx
19336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19337 Document ! Settings
19342 dialog and switching the
19346 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
19347 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
19349 \begin_inset space ~
19355 \begin_layout Labeling
19356 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19368 \begin_inset space ~
19372 \begin_inset space ~
19376 \begin_inset Quotes els
19380 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19386 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19390 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19394 \begin_inset Quotes els
19398 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19401 quotation marks (as common, e.
19402 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19408 \begin_layout Labeling
19409 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19412 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19416 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19420 \begin_inset space ~
19424 \begin_inset space ~
19428 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19432 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19438 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19442 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19446 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19450 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19453 quotation marks (as common, e.
19454 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19460 \begin_layout Labeling
19461 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19464 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19468 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19472 \begin_inset space ~
19476 \begin_inset space ~
19480 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19484 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19490 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19494 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19498 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19502 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19505 quotation marks (as common, e.
19506 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19512 \begin_layout Labeling
19513 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19516 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19520 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19524 \begin_inset space ~
19528 \begin_inset space ~
19532 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19536 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19542 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19546 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19550 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19554 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19557 quotation marks (as common, e.
19558 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19564 \begin_layout Labeling
19565 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19568 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19572 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19576 \begin_inset space ~
19580 \begin_inset space ~
19584 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19588 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19594 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19598 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19602 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19606 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19609 quotation marks (as common, e.
19610 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19613 g., in Switzerland)
19616 \begin_layout Labeling
19617 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19620 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19624 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19628 \begin_inset space ~
19632 \begin_inset space ~
19636 \begin_inset Quotes als
19640 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19646 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19650 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19654 \begin_inset Quotes als
19658 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19661 quotation marks (as common, e.
19662 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19668 \begin_layout Labeling
19669 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19672 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19676 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19680 \begin_inset space ~
19684 \begin_inset space ~
19688 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19692 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19698 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19702 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19706 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19710 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19713 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
19716 \begin_layout Labeling
19717 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19720 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19724 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19728 \begin_inset space ~
19732 \begin_inset space ~
19736 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19740 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19746 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19750 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19754 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19758 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19761 quotation marks (as common, e.
19762 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19765 g., in Great Britain)
19768 \begin_layout Labeling
19769 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19772 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19776 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19780 \begin_inset space ~
19784 \begin_inset space ~
19788 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19792 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19798 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19802 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19806 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19810 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19813 quotation marks (as common, e.
19814 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19820 \begin_layout Labeling
19821 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19824 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19828 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19832 \begin_inset space ~
19836 \begin_inset space ~
19840 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19844 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19850 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19854 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19858 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19862 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19865 quotation marks (another style common in France)
19869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19870 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
19871 since these look identical to the inner marks.
19872 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
19873 the inner marks differ).
19881 \begin_layout Labeling
19882 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19885 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19889 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19893 \begin_inset space ~
19897 \begin_inset space ~
19901 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19905 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19911 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19915 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19919 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19923 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19926 quotation marks (as common, e.
19927 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19933 \begin_layout Labeling
19934 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19937 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19941 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19945 \begin_inset space ~
19949 \begin_inset space ~
19953 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19957 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19963 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19967 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19971 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19975 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19978 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
19981 \begin_layout Labeling
19982 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19983 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19991 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19997 \begin_inset space ~
20001 \begin_inset space ~
20007 \begin_inset Quotes jls
20015 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
20019 \begin_inset Quotes jld
20023 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
20027 \begin_inset Quotes jls
20031 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
20034 quotation marks (as common, e.
20035 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20043 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
20044 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
20052 \begin_layout Labeling
20053 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20054 \begin_inset Quotes kld
20062 \begin_inset Quotes krd
20068 \begin_inset space ~
20072 \begin_inset space ~
20078 \begin_inset Quotes kls
20086 \begin_inset Quotes krs
20090 \begin_inset Quotes kld
20094 \begin_inset Quotes krd
20098 \begin_inset Quotes kls
20102 \begin_inset Quotes krs
20105 quotation marks (as common, e.
20106 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20109 g., in North Korea and China)
20113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20114 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
20115 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
20123 \begin_layout Standard
20124 Inner quotation marks
20128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20129 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
20130 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
20131 case (and specifically the British style shows that
20132 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20136 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20139 does not necessarily mean
20140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20148 This is why we call them
20149 \begin_inset Quotes els
20153 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20157 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20161 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20169 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
20171 \begin_inset Quotes els
20175 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20178 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
20181 arg "quote-insert inner"
20186 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20192 \begin_layout Standard
20193 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
20194 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
20195 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
20196 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
20197 If you check the setting
20199 Use dynamic quotation marks
20203 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20204 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
20207 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
20208 they appear in a special color).
20209 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
20210 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
20212 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20215 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
20218 \begin_layout Standard
20219 Individual quotation marks (i.
20220 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20223 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
20224 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
20228 \begin_layout Subsection
20230 \begin_inset Index idx
20233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20234 Typography ! Ligatures
20240 \begin_inset Index idx
20243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20272 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20274 name "subsec:Ligatures"
20281 \begin_layout Standard
20282 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
20283 print them as single characters.
20284 These groups are known as
20289 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
20290 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
20292 Here are the standard ligatures:
20295 \begin_layout Itemize
20299 \begin_layout Itemize
20303 \begin_layout Itemize
20307 \begin_layout Itemize
20311 \begin_layout Itemize
20315 \begin_layout Standard
20316 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
20319 \begin_layout Standard
20320 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
20321 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
20322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20329 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
20330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20342 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20345 To break a ligature, use
20347 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20348 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20350 \begin_inset space ~
20357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20368 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
20370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20374 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20382 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20385 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
20387 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20393 \begin_layout Subsection
20395 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
20397 \begin_inset Index idx
20400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20410 \begin_layout Standard
20413 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20414 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
20418 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
20421 \begin_layout Description
20423 The name of the game.
20426 \begin_layout Description
20428 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
20432 \begin_layout Description
20434 The \SpecialChar TeX
20435 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
20439 \begin_layout Description
20440 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
20441 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20445 \begin_layout Standard
20446 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20452 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
20456 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20460 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
20461 world to give programs geek version numbers.
20462 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
20463 converges to the number
20464 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
20467 : The actual version is
20468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20476 , the previous one was
20477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20488 \begin_layout Subsection
20490 \begin_inset Index idx
20493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20502 \begin_layout Standard
20503 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
20504 space between two words.
20505 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
20508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20515 for units use the menu
20517 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20518 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20520 \begin_inset space ~
20528 arg "space-insert thin"
20534 \begin_layout Standard
20535 Here is an example to show the differences:
20538 \begin_layout Standard
20539 \begin_inset Tabular
20540 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
20541 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
20542 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20543 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20550 \begin_inset space ~
20554 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20566 space between number and unit
20573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20578 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20582 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20594 half space between number and unit
20607 \begin_layout Subsection
20609 \begin_inset Index idx
20612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20613 Typography ! Widows and orphans
20621 \begin_layout Standard
20622 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
20624 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
20625 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
20626 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
20627 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
20628 These bits of text became known as
20639 \begin_layout Standard
20640 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
20641 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
20642 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
20643 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
20644 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
20645 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
20646 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
20647 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
20648 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
20649 \begin_inset Newline newline
20657 \begin_inset Newline newline
20665 \begin_inset Newline newline
20668 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20669 preamble of your document to avoid them.
20670 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
20672 \begin_inset space ~
20676 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20678 key "latexcompanion"
20684 \begin_inset space ~
20688 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20695 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20696 's page break mechanism.
20699 \begin_layout Chapter
20700 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
20701 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20703 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
20710 \begin_layout Standard
20711 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
20714 \begin_inset space ~
20720 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
20723 \begin_layout Section
20725 \begin_inset Index idx
20728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20735 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20744 \begin_layout Standard
20746 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
20749 \begin_layout Description
20752 \begin_inset space ~
20755 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
20756 \begin_inset Newline newline
20760 \begin_inset Note Note
20763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20764 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
20772 \begin_layout Description
20773 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
20774 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
20775 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
20778 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20779 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20781 \begin_inset space ~
20787 \begin_inset Newline newline
20791 \begin_inset Note Comment
20794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20795 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
20804 \begin_layout Description
20806 \begin_inset space ~
20809 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
20810 set in the document settings under
20812 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
20814 \begin_inset space ~
20820 \begin_inset Newline newline
20824 \begin_inset Newline newline
20828 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20837 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
20838 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
20843 of a comment that appears in the output.
20849 \begin_inset Newline newline
20853 \begin_inset Newline newline
20856 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
20859 \begin_layout Standard
20860 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
20868 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20872 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
20875 \begin_layout Section
20877 \begin_inset Index idx
20880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20887 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20889 name "sec:Footnotes"
20896 \begin_layout Standard
20898 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
20901 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20904 or the toolbar button
20907 arg "footnote-insert"
20919 \begin_inset Graphics
20920 filename clipart/footnote.png
20929 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20930 's representation of your footnote.
20940 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20959 label, the box will
20963 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
20964 Clicking on the box label again will close
20977 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
20978 and click on the footnote
20993 \begin_layout Standard
20994 Here is an example footnote:
21002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21003 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
21011 \begin_layout Standard
21012 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
21013 position where the footnote box is placed.
21014 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
21015 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
21016 according to the document class.
21018 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
21019 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
21025 ey are described in the
21028 \begin_inset space ~
21036 \begin_layout Section
21038 \begin_inset Index idx
21041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21048 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21050 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
21057 \begin_layout Standard
21058 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
21060 When you insert a margin note via the menu
21062 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21064 \begin_inset space ~
21069 or the toolbar button
21072 arg "marginalnote-insert"
21091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21098 appearing within your text.
21099 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
21100 's representation of your margin
21109 \begin_layout Standard
21110 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
21114 \begin_inset Marginal
21117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21119 This is a marginal note.
21127 \begin_layout Standard
21128 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
21129 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
21130 pages, right on odd pages.
21133 \begin_layout Standard
21134 For further information about marginal notes see the section
21137 \begin_inset space ~
21145 \begin_inset space ~
21153 \begin_layout Section
21154 Graphics and Images
21155 \begin_inset Index idx
21158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21165 \begin_inset Index idx
21168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21175 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21177 name "sec:Graphics"
21184 \begin_layout Standard
21185 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
21186 you want and click on the toolbar icon
21189 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21194 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21198 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
21201 \begin_layout Standard
21202 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
21207 tab allows you to choose your image file.
21208 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
21210 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
21211 \begin_inset space ~
21215 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21217 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
21224 \begin_layout Standard
21229 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
21230 of the image in the output.
21231 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
21235 \begin_inset space ~
21239 \begin_inset space ~
21248 \begin_inset space ~
21252 \begin_inset space ~
21256 \begin_inset space ~
21261 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
21262 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
21270 \begin_layout Standard
21274 \begin_inset space ~
21278 \begin_inset space ~
21283 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
21284 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
21286 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
21291 \begin_inset space ~
21296 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
21297 with the image size is printed.
21300 \begin_layout Standard
21301 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
21302 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
21304 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
21307 \begin_layout Standard
21309 \begin_inset Graphics
21310 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
21318 \begin_layout Standard
21319 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
21320 the image into a float, see section
21321 \begin_inset space ~
21325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21327 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
21334 \begin_layout Subsection
21336 \begin_inset Index idx
21339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21346 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21348 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
21355 \begin_layout Standard
21356 You can insert images in any known file format.
21357 But as we explained in section
21358 \begin_inset space ~
21362 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21364 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
21368 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
21370 therefore uses the program
21374 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
21375 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
21376 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
21377 \begin_inset space ~
21381 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21383 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
21390 \begin_layout Standard
21391 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
21394 \begin_layout Description
21396 \begin_inset space ~
21399 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
21400 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
21401 Well-known bitmap image formats are
21402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21405 Graphics Interchange Format
21406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21409 (GIF, file extension
21410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21422 \begin_inset Index idx
21425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21457 Portable Network Graphics
21458 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21461 (PNG, file extension
21462 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21470 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21474 \begin_inset Index idx
21477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21509 Joint Photographic Experts Group
21510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21513 (JPG, file extension
21514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21526 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21538 \begin_inset Index idx
21541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21572 \begin_layout Description
21574 \begin_inset space ~
21577 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
21579 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
21580 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
21581 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
21582 \begin_inset Newline newline
21585 Scalable image formats can be
21586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21589 Scalable Vector Graphics
21590 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21593 (SVG, file extension
21594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21606 \begin_inset Index idx
21609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21638 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21641 Encapsulated PostScript
21642 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21645 (EPS, file extension
21646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21658 \begin_inset Index idx
21661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21693 Portable Document Format
21694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21697 (PDF, file extension
21698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21706 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21710 \begin_inset Index idx
21713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21728 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
21729 result will not be scalable.
21730 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
21735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21736 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
21744 \begin_layout Standard
21745 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
21752 \begin_layout Subsection
21753 Grouping of Image Settings
21754 \begin_inset Index idx
21757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21758 Images ! Settings grouping
21766 \begin_layout Standard
21767 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
21769 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
21770 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
21772 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
21773 need to manually change each of them.
21777 \begin_layout Standard
21778 A new group can be set by pressing the button
21781 \begin_inset space ~
21785 \begin_inset space ~
21797 \begin_inset space ~
21801 \begin_inset space ~
21807 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
21808 and checking the name of the desired group.
21811 \begin_layout Section
21813 \begin_inset Index idx
21816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21823 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21832 \begin_layout Standard
21833 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
21836 arg "tabular-insert"
21841 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21845 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns
21846 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288358
21847 , and you can select a specific (border) style
21850 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
21851 from the rest of the table.
21852 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
21853 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
21855 Here is an example table:
21858 \begin_layout Standard
21860 \begin_inset Tabular
21861 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
21862 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21863 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21864 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21865 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21866 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22064 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288479
22068 \begin_layout Standard
22070 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288540
22071 This corresponds to the
22072 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22076 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22079 table style listed in the style selection.
22082 \begin_layout Standard
22084 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288387
22085 Other available styles include:
22088 \begin_layout Itemize
22090 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288551
22092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22099 which looks line the above table, but without the first row being separated
22103 \begin_layout Itemize
22105 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288764
22106 a border-less table with no lines at all,
22109 \begin_layout Itemize
22111 \change_inserted -712698321 1554289543
22113 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22117 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22120 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and
22121 bold top/bottom lines (see
22132 \begin_layout Standard
22134 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288823
22135 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar
22136 button can be changed in
22138 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
22139 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
22143 So if the default style above is not the one you need, you should alter
22147 \begin_layout Subsection
22151 \begin_layout Standard
22152 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
22155 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
22159 This brings up the table dialog.
22160 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
22161 cursor is placed currently.
22162 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
22163 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
22164 done on all of your selection.
22167 \begin_layout Standard
22168 In addition to the table dialog, the
22171 \begin_inset space ~
22176 helps you in setting table properties.
22177 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
22180 \begin_layout Standard
22184 \begin_inset space ~
22189 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
22190 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
22191 current cell respectively.
22192 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
22194 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
22195 of text, see section
22196 \begin_inset space ~
22200 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22202 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
22209 \begin_layout Standard
22210 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
22211 using the check box
22220 This will merge the cells to
22224 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
22225 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
22226 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
22227 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
22228 in the last row without the upper border:
22231 \begin_layout Standard
22233 \begin_inset Tabular
22234 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
22235 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
22236 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22237 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
22238 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
22239 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22250 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22259 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22335 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22370 \begin_layout Standard
22371 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
22372 -arguments for the table.
22373 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
22374 explained in the chapter
22381 \begin_inset space ~
22387 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
22388 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
22389 but are visible in the output.
22392 \begin_layout Standard
22393 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
22396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22401 Most DVI-viewers are
22405 able to display rotations.
22413 \begin_layout Standard
22418 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
22423 adds lines for all cell borders.
22426 \begin_layout Subsection
22428 \begin_inset Index idx
22431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22432 Tables ! Multi-page
22438 \begin_inset Index idx
22441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22450 \begin_layout Standard
22451 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
22454 \begin_inset space ~
22458 \begin_inset space ~
22466 \begin_inset space ~
22471 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
22472 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
22475 \begin_layout Description
22480 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22481 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
22482 Except for the first page, if
22485 \begin_inset space ~
22493 \begin_layout Description
22497 \begin_inset space ~
22502 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22503 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
22506 \begin_layout Description
22511 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22512 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
22513 except for the last page, if
22516 \begin_inset space ~
22524 \begin_layout Description
22528 \begin_inset space ~
22533 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22534 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
22537 \begin_layout Description
22538 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
22539 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
22541 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22545 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
22548 \begin_inset space ~
22556 \begin_layout Standard
22557 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
22558 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
22559 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
22565 In this context, first means first in this order:
22568 \begin_inset space ~
22580 \begin_inset space ~
22585 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
22588 \begin_layout Standard
22590 \begin_inset Tabular
22591 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
22592 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
22593 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
22594 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22595 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22596 <row endfirsthead="true">
22597 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22603 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
22608 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22617 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22627 <row endfirsthead="true">
22628 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22639 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22648 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22660 <row endhead="true">
22661 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22672 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22681 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22691 <row endhead="true">
22692 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22703 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22712 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22724 <row endfoot="true">
22725 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22736 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22745 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22776 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23717 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23726 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
23729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23735 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23746 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23777 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23808 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23839 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23870 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23901 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23932 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23963 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23994 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24025 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24056 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24087 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24118 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24149 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24180 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24211 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24242 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24273 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24304 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24335 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24366 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24397 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24428 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24459 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24490 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24521 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24552 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24583 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24614 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24645 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24676 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24706 <row endlastfoot="true">
24707 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24718 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
24721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24727 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24744 \begin_layout Subsection
24746 \begin_inset Index idx
24749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24756 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24758 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
24765 \begin_layout Standard
24766 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
24767 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
24768 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
24769 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
24773 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
24776 \begin_layout Standard
24777 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
24778 for the column in the table dialog.
24779 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
24780 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
24784 \begin_layout Standard
24786 \begin_inset Tabular
24787 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
24788 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24789 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24790 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
24791 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24811 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24880 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24936 This is longer now.
24941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24992 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24993 This is longer now.
24998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25024 \begin_layout Standard
25025 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
25026 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
25030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25031 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
25032 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
25038 Selection with the mouse or with
25042 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
25043 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
25044 the selection from outside the table.
25047 \begin_layout Section
25049 \begin_inset Index idx
25052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25059 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25068 \begin_layout Subsection
25072 \begin_layout Standard
25073 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
25074 have a fixed location.
25076 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25080 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25083 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
25091 \begin_inset space ~
25096 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
25097 too many notes on the current page.
25100 \begin_layout Standard
25101 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
25102 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
25103 and pages without text.
25104 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
25105 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
25106 Floats are therefore numbered.
25107 Referencing is described in section
25108 \begin_inset space ~
25112 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25114 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25121 \begin_layout Standard
25122 To insert a float, use the menu
25124 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25128 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
25129 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
25131 After the label you can insert the caption text.
25132 \begin_inset Index idx
25135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25141 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
25142 paragraph within the float.
25143 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
25144 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
25145 left-clicking on the box label.
25146 A closed float box looks like this:
25147 \begin_inset Graphics
25148 filename clipart/float.png
25153 – a gray button with a red label.
25156 \begin_layout Standard
25157 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
25159 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
25162 \begin_layout Subsection
25164 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25166 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
25171 \begin_inset Index idx
25174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25175 Floats ! Figure floats
25183 \begin_layout Standard
25185 \begin_inset space ~
25189 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25191 reference "fig:A-star-in"
25195 was created using the menu
25197 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25198 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
25204 arg "float-insert figure"
25208 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
25211 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25217 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
25221 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
25222 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
25224 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25226 \begin_inset space ~
25234 arg "layout-paragraph"
25240 \begin_layout Standard
25241 \begin_inset Float figure
25248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25250 \begin_inset Graphics
25251 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25261 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25264 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25266 name "fig:A-star-in"
25283 \begin_layout Standard
25284 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
25285 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
25287 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25296 ) and refer to it using the menu
25298 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25304 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25308 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
25309 vague references like
25310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25314 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25317 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
25318 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
25320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25328 For more about cross-references, see section
25329 \begin_inset space ~
25333 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25335 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25342 \begin_layout Standard
25343 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
25344 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
25345 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
25346 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
25347 as described in section
25348 \begin_inset space ~
25352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25354 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
25360 \begin_inset space ~
25364 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25366 reference "fig:Two-images"
25370 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
25371 You can also set the images one below the other.
25373 \begin_inset space ~
25377 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25379 reference "fig:Undefinable"
25384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25386 reference "fig:Star"
25390 are the subfigures.
25393 \begin_layout Standard
25394 \begin_inset Float figure
25401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25402 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25406 \begin_inset Float figure
25413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25414 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25417 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25419 name "fig:Undefinable"
25431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25432 \begin_inset Graphics
25433 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
25445 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25449 \begin_inset Float figure
25456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25457 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25460 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25475 \begin_inset Graphics
25476 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25488 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25495 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25498 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25500 name "fig:Two-images"
25517 \begin_layout Subsection
25519 \begin_inset Index idx
25522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25523 Floats ! Table floats
25531 \begin_layout Standard
25532 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
25534 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25535 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
25538 or the toolbar button
25541 arg "float-insert table"
25545 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
25546 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
25547 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
25549 \begin_inset space ~
25553 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25555 reference "tab:Table-float"
25562 \begin_layout Standard
25563 \begin_inset Float table
25570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25571 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25574 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25576 name "tab:Table-float"
25588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25590 \begin_inset Tabular
25591 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
25592 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25593 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25594 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25595 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25722 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
25730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25743 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25746 \end{array}\right]$
25754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25767 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
25788 \begin_layout Subsection
25790 \begin_inset Index idx
25793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25802 \begin_layout Standard
25804 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
25805 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
25806 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
25808 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
25816 \begin_inset space ~
25824 \begin_layout Section
25826 \begin_inset Index idx
25829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25838 \begin_layout Standard
25840 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
25842 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
25843 \begin_inset space \space{}
25850 \begin_layout Standard
25851 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
25852 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
25854 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25858 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
25859 and its alignment within the page.
25862 \begin_layout Standard
25864 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25874 height_special "totalheight"
25879 backgroundcolor "none"
25882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25885 This is a minipage.
25886 The text is set in an italic style.
25889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25892 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
25893 another formatting.
25901 \begin_layout Standard
25902 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25905 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
25909 as described in section
25910 \begin_inset space ~
25914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25916 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
25921 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25927 \begin_layout Standard
25928 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25938 height_special "totalheight"
25943 backgroundcolor "none"
25946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25947 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25948 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25954 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25958 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25968 height_special "totalheight"
25973 backgroundcolor "none"
25976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25977 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25978 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25986 \begin_layout Standard
25987 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25993 \begin_layout Standard
25994 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
25996 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
26003 \begin_inset space ~
26011 \begin_layout Chapter
26012 Mathematical Formulas
26013 \begin_inset Index idx
26016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26023 \begin_inset Index idx
26026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26055 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26057 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
26064 \begin_layout Standard
26065 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
26070 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
26073 \begin_layout Section
26075 \begin_inset Index idx
26078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26087 \begin_layout Standard
26088 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
26101 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
26103 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
26104 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
26105 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
26107 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26113 \begin_layout Standard
26114 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
26118 \begin_inset space ~
26123 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
26126 \begin_layout Standard
26127 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
26128 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
26131 \begin_layout Standard
26132 This is a line with an inline formula
26133 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
26139 \begin_layout Standard
26140 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
26141 paragraph, like this one:
26142 \begin_inset Formula
26149 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
26152 \begin_layout Standard
26154 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
26156 For example, typing
26157 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26167 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26170 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
26171 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
26175 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
26178 \begin_inset space ~
26186 \begin_layout Subsection
26187 Navigating in Formulas
26188 \begin_inset Index idx
26191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26200 \begin_layout Standard
26201 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
26202 achieved with the arrow keys.
26204 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
26205 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
26210 will leave a formula construct (a square root
26211 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
26215 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
26219 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
26222 \end{array}\right]$
26230 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
26235 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
26236 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
26239 \begin_layout Standard
26244 , printed in this document as
26245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26249 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26253 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26256 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
26257 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
26258 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
26263 For example, if you want
26264 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
26272 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26282 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26286 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26291 , since in the latter case only the
26294 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
26299 will be under the square root sign:
26300 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
26306 \begin_layout Standard
26307 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
26309 \begin_inset Formula
26311 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
26320 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
26321 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
26324 \begin_layout Subsection
26328 \begin_layout Standard
26329 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
26330 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
26334 and a cursor movement key to select text.
26335 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
26336 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
26337 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
26338 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
26342 \begin_layout Subsection
26343 Exponents and Subscripts
26344 \begin_inset Index idx
26347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26354 \begin_inset Index idx
26357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26366 \begin_layout Standard
26367 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
26370 arg "math-superscript"
26376 arg "math-subscript"
26379 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
26381 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
26384 , type in a formula
26387 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26397 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
26403 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
26407 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
26413 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26419 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
26421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26428 , you have to use an extra
26432 to separate the circumflex and the character.
26433 For example, if you want
26434 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
26440 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26446 Subscripts are similar: To get
26447 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
26453 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26461 \begin_layout Subsection
26463 \begin_inset Index idx
26466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26475 \begin_layout Standard
26476 Create a fraction either with the command
26482 or by using the icon
26485 arg "math-insert \\frac"
26491 \begin_inset space ~
26497 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
26498 The cursor is above the fraction line.
26499 To move it to the bottom, simply press
26504 To move back up, press
26509 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
26510 \begin_inset Formula
26512 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
26515 \end{array}\right)}\right]
26523 \begin_layout Subsection
26525 \begin_inset Index idx
26528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26537 \begin_layout Standard
26538 Roots can be created using the
26541 \begin_inset space ~
26549 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
26555 arg "math-insert \\root"
26577 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
26583 always produces a square root.
26586 \begin_layout Subsection
26587 Operators with Limits
26588 \begin_inset Index idx
26591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26598 \begin_inset Index idx
26601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26608 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26610 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26617 \begin_layout Standard
26619 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
26623 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
26626 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
26627 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
26628 by entering them as you would enter a super-
26629 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
26630 The sum operator will automatically place its
26631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26635 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26638 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
26640 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
26644 \begin_inset Formula
26646 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
26651 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
26655 \begin_layout Standard
26656 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
26658 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
26659 behind the operator and using the menu
26661 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26662 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26664 \begin_inset space ~
26668 \begin_inset space ~
26682 \begin_layout Standard
26683 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
26684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26692 \begin_inset Index idx
26695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26702 \begin_inset Formula
26704 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
26709 which will place the
26710 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
26714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26718 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26722 In inline formulas it looks like this:
26723 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
26729 \begin_layout Standard
26730 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
26737 Have a look at section
26738 \begin_inset space ~
26742 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26744 reference "subsec:Functions"
26748 for an explanation of function macros.
26751 \begin_layout Subsection
26753 \begin_inset Index idx
26756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26765 \begin_layout Standard
26766 Most math symbols can be found in the
26769 \begin_inset space ~
26774 under one of several categories; including
26791 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
26795 \begin_layout Standard
26796 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26797 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
26798 don't have to use the
26801 \begin_inset space ~
26806 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
26808 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
26811 \begin_layout Subsection
26813 \begin_inset Index idx
26816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26825 \begin_layout Standard
26826 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
26832 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
26838 \begin_inset space ~
26846 arg "math-insert \\space"
26850 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
26851 For example, the sequence
26856 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
26859 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26861 \begin_inset Graphics
26862 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
26867 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
26868 the space marker and enter space again several times.
26869 With every space enter the size will be changed.
26870 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
26871 , because they are negative
26873 Here are two examples:
26876 \begin_layout Standard
26886 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
26892 \begin_layout Standard
26902 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
26908 \begin_layout Subsection
26910 \begin_inset Index idx
26913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26920 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26922 name "subsec:Functions"
26929 \begin_layout Standard
26933 \begin_inset space ~
26938 contains under the button
26941 arg "math-insert \\functions"
26944 a number of function macros, such as
26945 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
26949 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
26957 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
26964 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
26965 avoid confusions, because
26966 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
26970 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
26976 \begin_layout Standard
26977 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
26979 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
26983 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
26989 \begin_layout Standard
26990 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
26991 are placed, as described in section
26992 \begin_inset space ~
26996 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26998 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
27005 \begin_layout Subsection
27007 \begin_inset Index idx
27010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27019 \begin_layout Standard
27020 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
27022 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
27023 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
27024 commands, for example, to enter
27025 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
27028 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
27029 Our example is entered by typing
27034 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27041 \begin_inset space ~
27045 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27047 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
27051 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
27054 \begin_layout Standard
27055 \begin_inset Float table
27062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27063 \begin_inset Caption Standard
27065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27066 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27068 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
27072 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
27080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27082 \begin_inset Tabular
27083 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
27084 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
27085 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27086 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27087 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27171 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
27181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27225 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
27235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27279 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
27289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27333 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
27343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27387 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
27397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27441 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
27451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27495 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
27505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27549 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
27559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27603 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
27613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27648 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
27669 \begin_layout Standard
27670 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
27673 \begin_inset space ~
27681 arg "math-insert \\hat"
27684 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
27688 \begin_layout Section
27689 Brackets and Delimiters
27690 \begin_inset Index idx
27693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27700 \begin_inset Index idx
27703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27710 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27712 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27719 \begin_layout Standard
27720 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
27722 For some purposes, using just the keys
27727 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
27728 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
27729 toolbar delimiter icon
27732 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27736 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
27737 \begin_inset Formula
27739 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
27747 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
27748 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
27752 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27755 and the expression on the right was entered using the
27761 \begin_inset Formula
27763 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
27771 \begin_layout Standard
27772 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
27773 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
27777 \begin_layout Standard
27778 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
27779 left side and right side.
27780 If you use the option
27783 \begin_inset space ~
27788 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
27789 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
27791 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
27796 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
27797 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
27800 \begin_layout Standard
27801 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
27802 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
27803 is to go inside the brackets.
27804 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
27809 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
27810 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
27811 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
27815 arg "math-delim ( )"
27821 \begin_layout Section
27822 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
27823 \begin_inset Index idx
27826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27833 \begin_inset Index idx
27836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27843 \begin_inset Index idx
27846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27847 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27855 \begin_layout Standard
27856 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
27860 \begin_inset space ~
27868 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
27872 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
27873 Here is an example:
27874 \begin_inset Formula
27876 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
27885 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
27886 \begin_inset space ~
27890 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27892 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27897 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
27898 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
27899 This alignment is set in the box
27904 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27912 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27916 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27924 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27928 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27936 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27942 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27950 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27953 for every column as default.
27954 For example, the sequence
27955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27966 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
27967 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
27968 corresponds to the relevant column.
27969 The result will look like this:
27970 \begin_inset Formula
27973 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
27974 column & has & has\,right\\
27975 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
27984 \begin_layout Standard
27985 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
27988 arg "newline-insert newline"
27991 while the cursor is in the matrix.
27992 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
27994 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27997 or the math toolbar.
28000 \begin_layout Standard
28001 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
28002 It can be created with the menu
28004 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28005 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28007 \begin_inset space ~
28019 Here is an example:
28020 \begin_inset Formula
28034 \begin_layout Standard
28035 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28038 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
28041 arg "newline-insert newline"
28045 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
28050 arg "newline-insert newline"
28053 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
28054 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28058 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28061 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
28062 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
28063 A new row is created by every further entry of
28066 arg "newline-insert newline"
28070 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
28071 Here is an example:
28072 \begin_inset Formula
28074 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
28075 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
28080 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
28081 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
28082 \begin_inset Formula
28084 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
28092 \begin_layout Standard
28093 The multi-line formula type described here is called
28100 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
28101 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
28102 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28104 reference "eq:asquared"
28109 The other types are described in section
28110 \begin_inset space ~
28114 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28116 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
28123 \begin_layout Section
28124 Formula Numbering and Referencing
28125 \begin_inset Index idx
28128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28129 Math ! Formula numbering
28135 \begin_inset Index idx
28138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28139 Math ! Referencing formulas
28145 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28147 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
28154 \begin_layout Standard
28155 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
28157 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28158 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28160 \begin_inset space ~
28164 \begin_inset space ~
28172 arg "math-number-toggle"
28176 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28177 within parentheses.
28178 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
28179 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
28180 the document class.
28181 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
28182 separated by a dot:
28183 \begin_inset Formula
28193 arg "math-number-toggle"
28196 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
28197 You can only number displayed formulas.
28200 \begin_layout Standard
28201 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
28203 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28204 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28206 \begin_inset space ~
28210 \begin_inset space ~
28218 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
28221 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
28222 \begin_inset Formula
28225 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
28231 To number all lines use the shortcut
28234 arg "math-number-toggle"
28240 \begin_layout Standard
28241 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28244 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
28245 A label is inserted with the menu
28247 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28256 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
28257 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
28258 It is recommended that you use the suggested
28259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28270 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
28271 label type when you have many labels in your document.
28272 We inserted in the following example the label
28273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28280 in the second line:
28281 \begin_inset Formula
28283 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
28284 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
28289 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
28290 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
28291 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
28293 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28295 \begin_inset space ~
28303 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
28307 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
28308 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28309 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
28310 as the formula number:
28313 \begin_layout Standard
28314 This is a cross-reference to equation (
28315 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28317 reference "eq:tanhExp"
28324 \begin_layout Standard
28325 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
28326 's cross-reference box are described in section
28327 \begin_inset space ~
28331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28333 reference "sec:Cross-References"
28338 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
28346 \begin_layout Section
28347 User defined math macros
28348 \begin_inset Index idx
28351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28360 \begin_layout Standard
28362 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
28363 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
28364 Math macros are explained in section
28367 \begin_inset space ~
28379 \begin_layout Section
28383 \begin_layout Subsection
28385 \begin_inset Index idx
28388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28397 \begin_layout Standard
28398 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
28399 To set a font in a formula, use the
28402 \begin_inset space ~
28410 arg "math-insert \\font"
28413 , or enter its command, listed in table
28414 \begin_inset space ~
28418 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28420 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
28427 \begin_layout Standard
28428 \begin_inset Float table
28435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28436 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28439 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28441 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
28445 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
28453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28455 \begin_inset Tabular
28456 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="2">
28457 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
28458 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28459 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28491 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
28499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28518 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
28526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28545 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
28553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28578 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
28586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28605 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
28613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28627 <row change="inserted 5863344 1592055455">
28628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28633 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
28634 \begin_inset Formula $\mathds{DOUBLESTROKE}$
28642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28647 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
28659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28663 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
28671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28697 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
28705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28719 <row change="inserted -131811572 1591595416">
28720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28725 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
28733 \begin_inset Formula $\mathscr{SCRIPT}$
28741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28746 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
28758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28762 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
28770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28796 \begin_layout Standard
28797 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28805 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
28808 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055666
28810 \change_deleted -131811572 1591595671
28814 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595667
28833 \begin_layout Standard
28834 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
28835 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
28840 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
28841 space when you need a space in the box.
28842 Here is an example where
28843 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28854 denotes the set of numbers:
28855 \begin_inset Formula
28857 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
28865 \begin_layout Standard
28866 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
28867 You can, for example, put a character in
28876 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
28880 \begin_inset Newline newline
28883 So it is better not to use this feature.
28886 \begin_layout Standard
28887 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
28888 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
28892 \begin_inset Newline newline
28895 You can only print them emboldened using the command
28901 , which works like the other typeface commands:
28902 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
28908 \begin_layout Standard
28915 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
28918 \begin_layout Standard
28919 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
28921 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28922 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28924 \begin_inset space ~
28932 \begin_layout Subsection
28934 \begin_inset Index idx
28937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28946 \begin_layout Standard
28947 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
28949 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
28953 \begin_inset space ~
28957 \begin_inset space ~
28965 \begin_inset space ~
28973 arg "math-insert \\font"
28977 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28978 in black instead of blue.
28979 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
28980 Here is an example:
28981 \begin_inset Formula
28984 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
28985 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
28994 \begin_layout Subsection
28996 \begin_inset Index idx
28999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29008 \begin_layout Standard
29009 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
29010 automatically chosen in most situations.
29028 For most characters,
29036 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
29037 and certain other structures, are set larger in
29042 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
29043 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
29044 thinks are appropriate.
29045 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
29048 arg "math-insert \\style"
29052 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
29053 For example, you can set
29054 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
29057 , which is normally in
29066 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
29070 The four styles are used in the following example:
29073 \begin_layout Standard
29074 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
29078 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
29082 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
29086 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
29092 \begin_layout Standard
29093 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
29094 is set in a particular size with the menu
29096 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29098 \begin_inset space ~
29103 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
29104 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
29105 will be adjusted to correspond.
29106 As an example here is a formula in the font size
29107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29117 \begin_layout Standard
29121 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
29127 \begin_layout Section
29128 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
29130 \begin_inset Index idx
29133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29140 \begin_inset Index idx
29143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29152 \begin_layout Standard
29154 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
29155 that are in common use.
29158 \begin_layout Subsection
29159 Enabling AMS-Support
29162 \begin_layout Standard
29163 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
29164 the document by selecting the checkbox
29167 \begin_inset space ~
29171 \begin_inset space ~
29175 \begin_inset space ~
29182 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29186 \begin_inset Index idx
29189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29190 Document ! Settings
29198 \begin_inset space ~
29204 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
29205 -errors in formulas,
29206 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
29209 \begin_layout Subsection
29211 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29213 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
29218 \begin_inset Index idx
29221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29222 Math ! Multi-line Equations
29230 \begin_layout Standard
29231 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
29232 provides a selection of different formula types.
29234 allows you to choose between
29255 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
29256 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29263 , for an explanation of these formula types.
29266 \begin_layout Chapter
29270 \begin_layout Section
29272 \begin_inset Index idx
29275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29282 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29284 name "sec:Cross-References"
29291 \begin_layout Standard
29292 One of \SpecialChar LyX
29293 's strengths is cross-references.
29294 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
29296 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
29297 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
29298 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
29301 \begin_layout Enumerate
29305 \begin_layout Enumerate
29306 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29308 name "enu:Second-item"
29315 \begin_layout Enumerate
29319 \begin_layout Standard
29320 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
29322 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29325 or by pressing the toolbar button
29332 A gray label box like this:
29333 \begin_inset Graphics
29334 filename clipart/label.png
29338 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
29340 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
29342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29375 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
29376 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
29378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29386 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29392 \begin_layout Standard
29393 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
29395 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29398 or the toolbar button
29401 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
29405 A gray cross-reference box like this:
29406 \begin_inset Graphics
29407 filename clipart/reference.png
29411 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
29413 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
29414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29422 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29426 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
29430 \begin_layout Standard
29431 As an alternative to
29433 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29436 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
29441 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
29442 to the actual cursor position via the menu
29444 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29456 \begin_layout Standard
29457 Here is our cross-reference: Item
29458 \begin_inset space ~
29462 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29464 reference "enu:Second-item"
29471 \begin_layout Standard
29472 It is recommended to use a protected space
29476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29477 described in section
29478 \begin_inset space ~
29482 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29484 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
29493 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
29494 line breaks between them.
29497 \begin_layout Standard
29498 There are eight formats of cross-references:
29501 \begin_layout Description
29502 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
29503 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29505 reference "fig:Two-images"
29512 \begin_layout Description
29513 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
29514 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
29516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29524 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29526 reference "eq:tanhExp"
29533 \begin_layout Description
29534 <page>: prints the page number: Page
29535 \begin_inset space ~
29539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29540 LatexCommand pageref
29541 reference "fig:Two-images"
29548 \begin_layout Description
29550 \begin_inset space ~
29554 \begin_inset space ~
29557 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
29558 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29559 LatexCommand vpageref
29560 reference "fig:Two-images"
29565 \begin_inset Newline newline
29568 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
29569 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
29570 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
29571 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
29572 it prints “on the next page”.
29573 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
29576 \begin_layout Description
29578 \begin_inset space ~
29582 \begin_inset space ~
29586 \begin_inset space ~
29589 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
29590 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29592 reference "fig:Two-images"
29597 \begin_inset Newline newline
29600 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
29606 ; otherwise it behaves like
29610 \begin_inset space ~
29614 \begin_inset space ~
29623 \begin_layout Description
29625 \begin_inset space ~
29628 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
29629 \begin_inset Newline newline
29633 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29641 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29651 \begin_inset Index idx
29654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29656 packages ! prettyref
29662 \begin_inset Index idx
29665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29667 packages ! refstyle
29678 \begin_inset Newline newline
29681 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
29682 -package should be used for this feature by setting
29685 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
29689 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29690 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29698 is the default and preferred because
29702 supports only English documents.
29703 The format is specified by using the command
29715 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29716 preamble of the document.
29717 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
29719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29735 \begin_inset Newline newline
29742 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
29747 \begin_inset Newline newline
29758 predefines reference formats for all available types.
29759 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
29761 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
29762 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
29767 , you might do so as follows:
29768 \begin_inset Newline newline
29775 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
29780 \begin_inset Newline newline
29783 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
29784 the package documentation
29785 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29787 key "prettyref,refstyle"
29793 \begin_inset Newline newline
29804 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
29811 \begin_layout Description
29813 \begin_inset space ~
29816 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
29817 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29818 LatexCommand nameref
29819 reference "fig:Two-images"
29826 \begin_layout Description
29828 \begin_inset space ~
29831 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29832 label for the reference:
29833 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29834 LatexCommand labelonly
29835 reference "fig:Two-images"
29840 \begin_inset Newline newline
29843 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
29844 Code, if you want to issue a command
29845 that \SpecialChar LyX
29851 , then you may want to use the
29854 \begin_inset space ~
29859 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
29861 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29869 This is the form needed for e.
29870 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29874 \begin_inset space \space{}
29881 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
29882 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
29884 The varieties are adjusted in the field
29888 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
29892 \begin_layout Standard
29893 You can only use the style
29897 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
29901 is always possible.
29904 \begin_layout Standard
29905 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
29906 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
29908 Referencing formulas is explained in section
29909 \begin_inset space ~
29913 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29915 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
29922 \begin_layout Standard
29923 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
29927 \begin_inset space ~
29931 \begin_inset space ~
29936 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
29937 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
29940 \begin_inset space ~
29945 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
29946 You can also go back with the toolbar button
29949 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
29955 \begin_layout Standard
29956 You can change labels at any time.
29957 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
29958 do not need to think about this.
29961 \begin_layout Standard
29962 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
29964 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
29968 \begin_layout Standard
29969 References are described in detail in the section
29970 \begin_inset space ~
29980 \begin_inset space ~
29988 \begin_layout Section
29989 Table of Contents and other Listings
29990 \begin_inset Index idx
29993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30000 \begin_inset Index idx
30003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30004 Navigating ! Outline
30010 \begin_inset Index idx
30013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30020 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30029 \begin_layout Subsection
30031 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30033 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
30040 \begin_layout Standard
30041 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
30043 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30044 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
30046 \begin_inset space ~
30050 \begin_inset space ~
30056 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
30058 If you click on it, the
30062 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
30063 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
30064 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
30066 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
30068 \begin_inset space ~
30073 that is described in section
30074 \begin_inset space ~
30078 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30080 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
30087 \begin_layout Standard
30088 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
30089 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
30091 \begin_inset space ~
30095 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30097 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
30101 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
30103 \begin_inset space ~
30107 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30109 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
30113 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
30115 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
30118 \begin_layout Subsection
30119 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
30120 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30122 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
30129 \begin_layout Standard
30130 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
30132 You can insert them via the
30134 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30135 List/Contents/References
30138 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
30141 \begin_layout Section
30142 URLs and Hyperlinks
30143 \begin_inset Index idx
30146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30153 \begin_inset Index idx
30156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30165 \begin_layout Subsection
30167 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30176 \begin_layout Standard
30177 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
30179 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30185 \begin_layout Standard
30186 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
30188 \begin_inset Flex URL
30191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30193 https://www.lyx.org
30201 \begin_layout Standard
30202 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
30208 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
30212 \begin_layout Standard
30213 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30221 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
30230 \begin_layout Subsection
30232 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30234 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
30241 \begin_layout Standard
30242 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
30244 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30247 or with the toolbar button
30254 The appearing dialog has two fields:
30263 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
30264 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
30265 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30267 name "LyX's homepage"
30268 target "https://www.lyx.org"
30273 , an Email address like this:
30274 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30276 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
30277 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
30283 , or a link to a file.
30288 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30296 \begin_layout Standard
30297 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
30299 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30310 to the link target.
30313 \begin_layout Standard
30314 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
30315 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
30316 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
30317 the text style dialog.
30318 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
30322 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30324 name "LyX's homepage"
30325 target "https://www.lyx.org"
30333 \begin_layout Standard
30334 The link text color can be changed, when the option
30338 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
30340 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30341 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30345 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
30347 \begin_inset Newline newline
30355 \begin_inset Newline newline
30362 in the PDF Properties dialog.
30363 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303457
30367 \begin_layout Section
30369 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303474
30371 \begin_inset Index idx
30374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30381 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30383 name "sec:Counters"
30390 \begin_layout Standard
30392 \change_inserted -584632292 1588374084
30393 One powerful feature of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30394 is its ability to manage counters.
30395 Mostly, this is handled automatically, but there are times one wants to
30396 modify counters directly.
30397 This can be done in LyX using the counter inset, which is accessible from
30399 This allows one to set a counter's value; to reset it (to zero); to add
30400 to the value (or subtract from it, since the value added can be negative);
30401 to save it; to restore the saved value; and to print the value.
30402 These effects can also be limited to LyX itself.
30403 And they will appear in HTML and DocBook output, as well as in LaTeX.
30407 \begin_layout Standard
30409 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529162
30410 There are five commands you can use:
30413 \begin_layout Enumerate
30415 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529167
30416 Set counter: Allows you to assign a specific value to a counter
30419 \begin_layout Enumerate
30421 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529177
30422 Increase counter: Allows you to add some specified amount to a counter (or
30423 to subtract, if you choose a negative number)
30426 \begin_layout Enumerate
30428 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529180
30429 Reset to zero: Sets the value of the counter to 0.
30432 \begin_layout Enumerate
30434 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529184
30435 Save value of counter: Saves the value of the counter so that it can later
30439 \begin_layout Enumerate
30441 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529187
30442 Restore value of counter: Restores the previously saved value.
30445 \begin_layout Standard
30447 \change_inserted -584632292 1588374230
30448 The dialog allows you to choose which counter you wish to modify from all
30449 those that are available in the current document class.
30454 \begin_layout Section
30456 \begin_inset Index idx
30459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30466 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30468 name "sec:Appendices"
30475 \begin_layout Standard
30476 Appendices are created with the menu
30478 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30480 \begin_inset space ~
30484 \begin_inset space ~
30490 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
30491 as the appendix part of the book.
30492 This part is marked with a red borderline.
30495 \begin_layout Standard
30496 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
30497 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
30498 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
30499 and the subsection number.
30500 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
30504 \begin_layout Standard
30506 \begin_inset space ~
30510 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30512 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
30520 \begin_inset space ~
30524 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30526 reference "subsec:Export"
30533 \begin_layout Section
30535 \begin_inset Index idx
30538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30545 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30547 name "sec:Bibliography"
30554 \begin_layout Standard
30555 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
30557 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
30558 \begin_inset space ~
30562 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30564 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30571 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
30576 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
30577 \begin_inset space ~
30581 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30583 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
30588 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
30589 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
30590 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
30594 using a bibliography database.
30597 \begin_layout Standard
30598 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
30599 use two bibliographies in this document, a
30603 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
30604 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
30605 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
30606 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
30607 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
30610 \begin_layout Subsection
30611 The Bibliography Environment
30612 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30614 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30621 \begin_layout Standard
30626 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
30628 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
30637 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
30639 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
30640 of ASCII characters only.
30644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30646 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30649 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
30655 \begin_inset Newline newline
30659 \begin_inset Flex URL
30662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30664 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
30674 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30681 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30684 , a short form of its title, as the key.
30685 \begin_inset Newline newline
30692 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
30693 the number of the entry.
30698 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30707 \begin_layout Standard
30708 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
30710 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30713 or the toolbar button
30716 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
30720 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
30721 containing the available citations.
30722 Select one or more keys from the list and
30732 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
30733 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
30737 \begin_layout Standard
30738 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
30739 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
30740 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
30742 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30752 \begin_layout Standard
30756 Companion Second Edition
30759 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30761 key "latexcompanion"
30769 \begin_layout Standard
30770 The \SpecialChar LyX
30771 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
30772 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30782 \begin_layout Standard
30783 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30790 \begin_inset Index idx
30793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30802 \change_deleted -712698321 1555659455
30803 the label needs to be given the form
30804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30815 Author A and Author B(Year)
30816 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30823 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
30830 \begin_inset space ~
30835 in the document settings
30836 \begin_inset Index idx
30839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30840 Document ! Settings
30847 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
30849 \begin_inset space ~
30855 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30857 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
30865 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
30867 Once you have done that, the
30871 dialog has three input fields instead of the
30888 The first one takes the Author list as it should be displayed in the citation
30889 reference, the second the year (without parentheses).
30890 These two are madatory.
30891 If there are multiple authors and you want to both refer to them as a full
30894 Baker, Jones, and Williams
30896 ) and in abrreviated form (
30903 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660544
30904 add the abbreviated form to
30908 and the full list to the optional
30916 \change_inserted -712698321 1555659886
30917 If specified like this,
30919 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles
30920 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660646
30923 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30930 is specified, toggling
30931 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30935 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30938 in the citation dialog or the citation context menu will switch between
30939 full and abbreviated list
30943 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660793
30944 Note that the author and year specified in the dialog are only used for
30945 the citation references.
30946 In the bibliography entry, author and year must be added manually.
30951 \begin_layout Standard
30952 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
30955 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30957 \begin_inset space ~
30965 arg "layout-paragraph"
30969 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
30972 \begin_layout Subsection
30973 Bibliography databases
30974 \begin_inset Index idx
30977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30978 Bibliography ! Databases
30984 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30986 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30993 \begin_layout Standard
30994 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
30999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31000 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
31002 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
31003 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
31008 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
31010 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
31011 your working field in a database.
31012 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
31013 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
31014 list for that document.
31015 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
31019 \begin_layout Standard
31020 The database is a text file with the file extension
31021 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31029 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31032 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
31033 The format is explained in
31034 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31041 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31043 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31045 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
31051 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
31052 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
31053 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
31055 \begin_inset Flex URL
31058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31060 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
31068 \begin_layout Standard
31070 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
31071 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31072 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
31074 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
31076 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
31077 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
31078 Those are addressed by
31083 \begin_inset Index idx
31086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31088 packages ! biblatex
31094 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31095 (although it has been significantly
31096 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31106 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31107 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31108 might conversely fail to correctly
31109 handle databases that use specific
31118 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
31122 \begin_layout Standard
31123 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31128 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
31130 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31134 \begin_inset Index idx
31137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31138 Document ! Settings
31150 \begin_inset space ~
31155 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31163 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31164 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31166 \begin_inset Index idx
31169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31170 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31179 \begin_layout Standard
31180 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31183 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31184 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31186 \begin_inset space ~
31192 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
31193 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31201 Add bibliography to TOC
31203 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
31208 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
31209 in the document or just the cited references.
31211 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
31216 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s), should this
31217 differ from the encoding of the document.
31222 \begin_layout Standard
31223 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31224 style file is a text file with the file extension
31225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31236 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
31237 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31238 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
31239 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
31241 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
31246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31247 For information on how this is done, have a look at
31248 \begin_inset Newline newline
31252 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31254 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
31264 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31269 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
31273 \begin_layout Standard
31274 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
31277 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31279 \begin_inset Index idx
31282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31283 Bibliography ! Biblatex
31289 \begin_inset Index idx
31292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31294 packages ! biblatex
31302 \begin_layout Standard
31303 Accessing a database via
31307 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31310 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31311 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31313 \begin_inset space ~
31319 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31320 you cannot select a
31325 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
31329 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31332 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
31333 As for the styles, note the following.
31338 \begin_layout Standard
31343 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
31345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31356 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
31357 file (text file with the file extension
31358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31369 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
31370 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
31372 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
31376 \begin_layout Standard
31381 styles are not set in the
31384 \begin_inset space ~
31389 dialog, but in the document settings.
31390 \begin_inset Index idx
31393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31394 Document ! Settings
31399 However, in the dialog in the
31403 field, which is only visible if you use
31407 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
31408 example how its heading will appear).
31409 These options are described in detail in the
31414 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31424 \begin_layout Standard
31425 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
31426 \begin_inset space ~
31430 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31432 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31442 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31443 Bibliography Processors
31446 \begin_layout Standard
31447 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
31448 uses a bibliography processor,
31449 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
31450 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
31451 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31453 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
31454 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
31457 \begin_layout Standard
31458 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
31460 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
31461 You can do this on a general level in
31463 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31464 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31465 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31468 or for individual documents in
31470 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31471 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31475 The following variants are available by default:
31478 \begin_layout Description
31479 biber a specific, modern processor
31480 \begin_inset Index idx
31483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31490 developed exclusively for
31494 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31500 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
31505 makes use of; if you use the
31509 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
31516 \begin_layout Description
31517 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
31518 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
31519 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
31523 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
31526 \begin_layout Description
31527 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
31528 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
31532 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
31536 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
31540 features are supported.
31543 \begin_layout Standard
31544 By default (with the
31550 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31551 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31564 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31565 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31566 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31569 ), \SpecialChar LyX
31570 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
31583 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31584 -based bibliography styles).
31585 This should suit most needs.
31588 \begin_layout Standard
31589 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
31590 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
31591 (in \SpecialChar LyX
31596 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31597 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
31598 You can adjust it in
31600 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31601 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31602 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31608 \begin_layout Standard
31609 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
31610 can add below the selection.
31611 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
31612 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31618 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31628 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31632 \begin_layout Standard
31634 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
31636 These are explained in detail in section
31638 Customizing Bibliographies
31642 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31647 Additional Features
31650 \change_inserted 5863208 1598273348
31654 \begin_layout Subsection
31656 \begin_inset Index idx
31659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31660 Bibliography ! Citation format
31666 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31668 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
31675 \begin_layout Standard
31676 Many different citation formats are common, e.
31677 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31681 \begin_inset space \space{}
31684 numerical citation (as
31685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31692 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
31693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31700 ) or author-year citations (as
31701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31710 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
31714 \begin_layout Standard
31715 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
31718 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31719 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31723 \begin_inset Index idx
31726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31727 Document ! Settings
31732 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
31738 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
31739 labels, is there to use
31742 \begin_inset space ~
31753 \begin_inset space ~
31758 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
31759 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31761 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31768 \begin_layout Standard
31769 With a bibliography database (see
31770 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31772 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
31779 ) one has in contrary to the
31783 environment full access to the formatting styles.
31784 These style formats are available:
31787 \begin_layout Description
31789 \begin_inset space ~
31792 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31793 -based approached without any additional packages
31794 (simple numeric citations).
31797 \begin_layout Description
31798 Biblatex loads the package
31803 \begin_inset Index idx
31806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31808 packages ! biblatex
31813 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
31815 Biblatex citation style
31819 Biblatex bibliography style
31822 Options to the package
31826 can be entered in the
31833 \begin_layout Description
31835 \begin_inset space ~
31839 \begin_inset space ~
31842 mode) loads the package
31846 with the natbib compatibility mode.
31847 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
31859 behavior very closely.
31864 this option has some additional styles.
31869 styles are also supported by this variant.
31872 \begin_layout Description
31874 \begin_inset space ~
31877 (BibTeX) loads the package
31882 \begin_inset Index idx
31885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31892 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
31895 \begin_layout Description
31897 \begin_inset space ~
31900 (BibTeX) loads the package
31905 \begin_inset Index idx
31908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31915 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
31918 \begin_layout Standard
31927 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
31929 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
31938 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
31940 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
31941 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
31943 Biblatex citation style
31946 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
31952 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
31956 \begin_layout Standard
31957 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
31958 are available in the
31963 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
31964 a name prefix such as
31965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31969 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31973 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31977 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31980 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
31981 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31985 \begin_inset space \space{}
31989 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31993 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32000 \begin_layout Standard
32001 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
32003 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32007 \begin_inset space \space{}
32010 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
32012 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32016 \begin_inset space \space{}
32020 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32024 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32032 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
32036 \begin_inset space ~
32044 \begin_inset space ~
32050 Here is a simple example where the text
32051 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32055 \begin_inset space ~
32059 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32062 appears after the reference:
32065 \begin_layout Quote
32067 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32070 key "latexcompanion"
32078 \begin_layout Standard
32079 All styles except for
32083 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
32085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32089 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32093 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
32097 \begin_layout Standard
32098 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
32099 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
32100 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
32105 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
32106 multi-citation (so-called
32107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32110 qualified citation lists
32111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32117 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
32122 dialog will display three columns in the field
32129 \begin_inset space ~
32137 \begin_inset space ~
32145 \begin_inset space ~
32151 If you double-click on an item's
32154 \begin_inset space ~
32162 \begin_inset space ~
32167 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
32170 General text before
32176 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
32179 \begin_layout Subsection
32181 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509964
32182 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32184 name "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
32188 Opening cited documents from within \SpecialChar LyX
32192 \begin_layout Standard
32194 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509000
32196 supports opening documents selected citations point to via the
32199 \begin_inset space ~
32203 \begin_inset space ~
32207 \begin_inset space ~
32211 \begin_inset space ~
32214 Content\SpecialChar ldots
32217 context menu if specific conditions are met:
32220 \begin_layout Itemize
32222 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509037
32223 If citation entries include any of the fields
32224 \begin_inset Flex Code
32227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32229 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32236 \begin_inset Flex Code
32239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32241 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32248 \begin_inset Flex Code
32251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32253 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32259 for BibLaTeX (covering arXiv, JSTOR, PubMed, HDL, Google Books
32260 \begin_inset Flex Code
32263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32265 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32271 ), the action will launch a web browser with the appropriate link.
32274 \begin_layout Itemize
32276 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509157
32277 If citation entries include any of the fields
32278 \begin_inset Flex Code
32281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32283 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32289 (filled by JabRef) or
32290 \begin_inset Flex Code
32293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32295 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32301 (filled by KBibTeX) containing an URL that points to a file on your local
32302 drive, the action will launch an appropriate file viewer.
32303 At the moment only absolute paths are accepted.
32306 \begin_layout Standard
32308 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509196
32309 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
32310 does not check if the URLs are valid.
32313 \begin_layout Standard
32315 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509866
32316 In addition to that, \SpecialChar LyX
32317 also searches your disk for matching files if you
32320 Search drive for cited files
32324 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32325 Preferences\SpecialChar ldots
32326 \SpecialChar menuseparator
32327 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32331 It uses the tokens supplied at
32335 in the same preferences section (by default: year and authors).
32336 Any of the tokens in the pattern must occur in the title (at arbitrary
32338 The pattern syntax uses specific keywords.
32339 These are basically Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32341 \begin_inset Flex Code
32344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32346 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509565
32354 , but there are also special keys, which are documented in the Customization
32358 Cite format description
32365 \begin_layout Section
32367 \begin_inset Index idx
32370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32377 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32386 \begin_layout Standard
32387 An index entry is created if you use the menu
32389 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32391 \begin_inset space ~
32396 or the toolbar button
32403 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
32404 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
32405 by \SpecialChar LyX
32406 as the index entry.
32409 \begin_layout Standard
32410 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
32412 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32413 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
32415 \begin_inset space ~
32421 A light blue box labeled
32422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32430 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32433 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
32434 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
32438 \begin_layout Standard
32439 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
32440 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
32441 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
32442 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32444 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32446 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
32454 \begin_layout Subsection
32455 Grouping Index Entries
32456 \begin_inset Index idx
32459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32468 \begin_layout Standard
32469 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
32471 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
32472 lists under the entry
32473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32481 First we create the entry
32482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32490 \begin_inset space ~
32494 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32496 reference "subsec:Lists"
32501 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
32502 \begin_inset space ~
32506 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32508 reference "sec:Itemize"
32512 , we insert the command
32515 \begin_layout Standard
32521 \begin_layout Standard
32525 \begin_layout Standard
32531 \begin_layout Standard
32532 for the enumerated list in section
32533 \begin_inset space ~
32537 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32539 reference "sec:Enumerate"
32546 \begin_layout Standard
32547 The exclamation mark
32548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32555 marks the grouping levels.
32556 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
32557 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
32558 If we don't have an index entry for
32559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32566 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
32569 \begin_layout Subsection
32571 \begin_inset Index idx
32574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32575 Index ! Page ranges
32583 \begin_layout Standard
32584 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
32586 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
32587 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
32588 an index entry in section
32589 \begin_inset space ~
32593 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32595 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
32602 \begin_layout Standard
32605 Paragraph environments|(
32608 \begin_layout Standard
32609 and another entry at the end of section
32610 \begin_inset space ~
32614 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32616 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
32623 \begin_layout Standard
32626 Paragraph environments|)
32629 \begin_layout Standard
32631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32654 respectively start and end the index range.
32655 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
32656 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
32657 the pages of the indexed document parts.
32658 An example is the index entry
32659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32662 Document ! Settings
32663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32669 \begin_layout Subsection
32671 \begin_inset Index idx
32674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32675 Index ! Cross referencing
32683 \begin_layout Standard
32684 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
32685 We referred for example in the index entry
32686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32694 \begin_inset space ~
32698 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32700 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
32704 ) to the index entry
32705 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32709 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32712 in the same section using the entry
32715 \begin_layout Standard
32718 GIF|see{Image formats}
32721 \begin_layout Standard
32722 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
32724 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
32725 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
32728 \begin_layout Subsection
32730 \begin_inset Index idx
32733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32734 Index ! Entry order
32742 \begin_layout Standard
32743 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
32744 follow the rules for the index order.
32745 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
32750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32751 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
32753 \begin_inset space ~
32757 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32759 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
32768 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
32769 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
32770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32794 \begin_inset Index idx
32797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32798 Dummy entries ! maïs
32804 \begin_inset Index idx
32807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32808 Dummy entries ! maître
32814 \begin_inset Index idx
32817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32818 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
32823 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
32824 maïs, maison, maître.
32825 To achieve this, we use the command
32828 \begin_layout Standard
32831 previous entry@current entry
32834 \begin_layout Standard
32835 In our case we want to have
32836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32851 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
32854 \begin_layout Standard
32860 \begin_layout Standard
32861 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
32862 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
32864 See the next subsection for an example.
32867 \begin_layout Subsection
32869 \begin_inset Index idx
32872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32873 Index ! Entry layout
32881 \begin_layout Standard
32882 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
32883 \begin_inset Index idx
32886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32889 This is an italic dummy entry
32894 You can also format the page number using the character
32895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32902 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32903 -command without a backslash.
32904 We can write for example
32907 \begin_layout Standard
32910 italic page number:|textit
32913 \begin_layout Standard
32914 to get the page number in italic.
32915 \begin_inset Index idx
32918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32919 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
32924 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
32925 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
32927 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32935 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32943 \begin_inset space ~
32949 Have a look at section
32950 \begin_inset space ~
32954 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32956 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32960 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32964 \begin_layout Standard
32965 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32973 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
32977 to generate the index, see section
32978 \begin_inset space ~
32982 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32984 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
32993 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
32998 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
32999 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33002 key "latexcompanion"
33015 \begin_layout Standard
33016 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
33018 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
33019 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
33020 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
33021 If so, put the following in the preamble
33024 \begin_layout Standard
33036 \begin_layout Standard
33040 \begin_layout Standard
33046 \begin_layout Standard
33047 in the index entry.
33048 \begin_inset Index idx
33051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33052 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
33057 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
33058 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
33059 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
33062 \begin_layout Standard
33063 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
33064 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
33065 a bold font for all index entries.
33066 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
33078 documentation for details,
33079 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33081 key "makeindex,xindy"
33089 \begin_layout Subsection
33091 \begin_inset Index idx
33094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33101 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33103 name "subsec:Index-Program"
33110 \begin_layout Standard
33111 If the index generation program
33115 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
33116 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
33120 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
33121 distribution, is used.
33125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33130 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
33131 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
33132 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
33133 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
33134 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
33144 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
33146 dialog, see section
33147 \begin_inset space ~
33151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33153 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
33158 The available options are listed and explained in
33159 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33161 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
33167 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
33171 \begin_layout Standard
33172 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
33173 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
33176 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33177 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33181 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
33182 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
33185 \begin_layout Subsection
33189 \begin_layout Standard
33190 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
33191 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
33192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33196 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33199 next to the standard index.
33201 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
33202 that add this feature.
33209 \begin_inset Index idx
33212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33214 packages ! splitidx
33219 package to generate multiple indexes.
33220 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
33225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33226 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
33228 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33236 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33237 style, but it also includes
33238 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
33239 Please consult the package's manual for details.
33247 \begin_layout Standard
33248 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
33249 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
33251 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33252 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33255 and select the option
33257 Use multiple Indexes
33264 already contains the standard index
33265 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33269 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33273 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
33274 also appear as a heading) to the
33278 input field and press the
33283 The new index now also appears in the list.
33284 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
33285 label color to the new index.
33288 \begin_layout Standard
33289 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
33292 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33293 List/Contents/References
33299 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
33300 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
33301 are additional features:
33304 \begin_layout Itemize
33305 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
33306 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
33309 \begin_layout Itemize
33310 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
33311 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
33316 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
33317 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
33318 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
33319 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
33322 \begin_layout Itemize
33327 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
33328 code in the name of the index.
33331 \begin_layout Section
33332 Nomenclature/Glossary
33333 \begin_inset Index idx
33336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33343 \begin_inset Index idx
33346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33375 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33377 name "sec:Nomenclature"
33384 \begin_layout Standard
33385 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
33386 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
33387 called nomenclature or glossary.
33390 \begin_layout Standard
33391 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33398 \begin_inset Index idx
33401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33409 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
33411 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33418 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
33422 \begin_layout Standard
33423 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
33424 and then use the menu
33426 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33432 \begin_inset space ~
33437 or the toolbar button
33440 arg "nomencl-insert"
33445 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33456 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
33459 \begin_layout Standard
33460 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
33461 The first is the term or
33465 that you wish to define.
33470 of the term or symbol.
33473 \begin_layout Standard
33474 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33482 To use \SpecialChar TeX
33483 code for nomenclature entries the option
33487 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
33495 \begin_layout Subsection
33496 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
33497 \begin_inset Index idx
33500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33501 Nomenclature ! Layout
33509 \begin_layout Standard
33510 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
33514 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
33517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33521 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33529 \begin_inset Newline newline
33537 \begin_inset Newline newline
33543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33550 character starts/ends the formula.
33551 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
33552 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
33554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33564 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
33574 \begin_layout Standard
33575 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33576 syntax is given in section
33577 \begin_inset space ~
33581 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33583 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33590 \begin_layout Standard
33594 \begin_inset space ~
33599 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
33601 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
33602 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33606 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33610 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33613 in this document is:
33614 \begin_inset Newline newline
33619 dummy entry for the character
33624 \begin_inset Newline newline
33636 \begin_inset space ~
33646 font use the command
33675 \begin_layout Standard
33676 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
33677 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33681 \begin_inset space \space{}
33685 \begin_inset Newline newline
33701 \begin_inset Newline newline
33704 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
33705 This command will make the font of all symbols
33712 \begin_inset space ~
33720 \begin_layout Standard
33721 If the characters |
33722 \begin_inset space \space{}
33726 \begin_inset space \space{}
33730 \begin_inset space \space{}
33734 \begin_inset space \space{}
33738 \begin_inset space \space{}
33741 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
33742 code they need to be escaped
33743 by adding a quote character in front of them.
33744 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
33745 LatexCommand nomenclature
33746 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
33747 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
33755 \begin_layout Subsection
33756 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
33757 \begin_inset Index idx
33760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33761 Nomenclature ! Sort order
33769 \begin_layout Standard
33770 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33771 -code of the symbol
33773 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
33775 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
33778 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
33779 LatexCommand nomenclature
33781 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
33789 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33793 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
33794 LatexCommand nomenclature
33797 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
33803 They will be sorted by
33804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33830 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33833 will be sorted before the
33837 since the character
33838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33842 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33845 is considered in sorting.
33848 \begin_layout Standard
33849 To control the sort order, you can edit the
33852 \begin_inset space ~
33857 field of the nomenclature dialog.
33858 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
33860 For the example given, you can insert
33864 in this field for the
33865 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33872 will be located before
33873 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33879 \begin_layout Standard
33880 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
33885 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33895 \begin_layout Subsection
33896 Nomenclature Options
33897 \begin_inset Index idx
33900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33901 Nomenclature ! Options
33907 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33909 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
33916 \begin_layout Standard
33921 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
33922 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
33925 \begin_layout Description
33926 refeq Appends the phrase
33927 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33942 to every nomenclature entry, where
33948 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
33951 \begin_layout Description
33952 refpage Appends the phrase
33953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33965 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33968 to every nomenclature entry, where
33974 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
33977 \begin_layout Description
33978 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
33981 \begin_layout Standard
33982 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
33983 class options list in the
33985 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33989 In this document the options
33996 \begin_layout Standard
33997 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
34003 \begin_layout Standard
34004 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
34005 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
34010 field in the nomenclature dialog:
34013 \begin_layout Description
34023 \begin_layout Description
34026 nomrefpage Like the
34033 \begin_layout Description
34036 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
34045 \begin_layout Description
34049 \begin_inset space ~
34055 \begin_inset space ~
34060 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
34063 \begin_layout Standard
34065 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34072 are automatically translated for most document languages.
34073 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
34077 \begin_layout Standard
34086 \begin_inset Newline newline
34092 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34096 \begin_inset space ~
34108 unskip, see equation
34111 \begin_inset Newline newline
34118 pagedeclaration}[1]{
34119 \begin_inset Newline newline
34125 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34129 \begin_inset space ~
34146 \begin_layout Standard
34147 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
34150 \begin_inset space ~
34155 in the document settings under
34158 \begin_inset space ~
34166 \begin_layout Standard
34174 \begin_inset Newline newline
34178 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34182 \begin_inset space ~
34194 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
34196 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
34197 \begin_inset Newline newline
34204 pagedeclaration}[1]{
34205 \begin_inset Newline newline
34209 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34213 \begin_inset space ~
34225 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
34230 \begin_layout Subsection
34231 Printing the Nomenclature
34232 \begin_inset Index idx
34235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34236 Nomenclature ! Printing
34244 \begin_layout Standard
34245 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
34247 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34248 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
34253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34261 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34264 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
34265 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
34266 You can choose between these settings:
34269 \begin_layout Description
34270 Default a space of 1
34271 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34277 \begin_layout Description
34279 \begin_inset space ~
34283 \begin_inset space ~
34286 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
34289 \begin_layout Description
34290 Custom custom space
34293 \begin_layout Standard
34294 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
34295 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34299 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34303 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
34311 For example, in order to change the name to
34315 , add the following line to the preamble:
34318 \begin_layout Standard
34331 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
34334 \begin_layout Standard
34335 When you are using another document language than English, replace
34336 \begin_inset Newline newline
34351 , where *** is the name of the language used.
34354 \begin_layout Subsection
34355 Nomenclature Program
34356 \begin_inset Index idx
34359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34360 Nomenclature ! Program
34366 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34368 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
34375 \begin_layout Standard
34381 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
34382 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
34384 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
34389 by adding options, see section
34390 \begin_inset space ~
34394 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34396 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
34401 The available options are listed and explained in
34402 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34404 key "nomencl,makeindex"
34412 \begin_layout Section
34414 \begin_inset Index idx
34417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34424 \begin_inset Index idx
34427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34428 Document ! Branches
34434 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34436 name "sec:Branches"
34443 \begin_layout Standard
34444 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
34445 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
34446 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
34447 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
34450 \begin_layout Standard
34451 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
34452 allows you to put text into branches.
34453 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
34454 To create a branch, either select the menu
34456 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34457 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
34460 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
34462 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34469 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
34470 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
34471 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
34472 and whether the name of the branch should
34473 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
34474 (see below for an example).
34475 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
34476 to the name of the other) and to add
34477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34485 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34489 \begin_inset space ~
34492 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
34493 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
34496 \begin_layout Standard
34497 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
34498 These boxes are inserted via the menu
34500 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34503 where you can choose a branch.
34504 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
34508 \begin_layout Standard
34509 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
34510 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
34513 \begin_layout Standard
34514 \begin_inset Branch Question
34518 \begin_layout Standard
34523 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
34531 \begin_layout Standard
34532 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34536 \begin_layout Standard
34541 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
34549 \begin_layout Standard
34556 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34557 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34560 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
34561 Consider for example a file
34562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34569 which has the above branches.
34571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34578 is active, the PDF export file would be called
34579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34587 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34591 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34595 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34602 branch were inactive,
34603 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34618 branch was active, likewise
34619 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34623 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34634 branch was active, and
34635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34638 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
34639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34642 if both branches were active.
34643 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
34644 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
34650 \begin_layout Standard
34651 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
34657 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
34658 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
34662 \begin_inset space ~
34670 \begin_layout Standard
34671 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34675 \begin_layout Standard
34681 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34688 branch is deactivated.
34694 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
34700 \begin_layout Standard
34701 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
34702 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
34703 definitions for each branch.
34704 For example you can define for the question branch
34708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34709 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34710 -syntax, see section
34711 \begin_inset space ~
34715 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34717 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34729 \begin_layout Standard
34739 \begin_layout Standard
34749 \begin_layout Standard
34750 and for the answer branch
34753 \begin_layout Standard
34763 \begin_layout Standard
34773 \begin_layout Standard
34774 \begin_inset Branch Question
34778 \begin_layout Standard
34782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34810 \begin_layout Standard
34811 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34815 \begin_layout Standard
34819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34847 \begin_layout Standard
34848 Now it is possible to use the
34852 question{\SpecialChar ldots
34859 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
34862 commands to obtain conditional output.
34863 Here is an example formula where only the
34870 \begin_inset Formula
34872 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
34880 \begin_layout Standard
34881 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
34889 \begin_layout Standard
34890 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
34892 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34896 \begin_inset space \space{}
34899 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
34901 For this advanced usage, see the
34907 Flex insets and InsetLayout
34912 \begin_layout Section
34914 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34916 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
34921 \begin_inset Index idx
34924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34933 \begin_layout Standard
34936 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34937 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34940 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
34942 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34948 \begin_inset Index idx
34951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34953 packages ! hyperref
34958 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
34959 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
34960 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
34961 part of the document.
34965 \begin_layout Standard
34966 The header information in the dialog tab
34970 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
34971 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
34972 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
34973 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
34977 \begin_inset space ~
34981 \begin_inset space ~
34986 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
34987 tries to extract the header information from your document title
34988 and author entries.
34992 \begin_inset space ~
34996 \begin_inset space ~
35000 \begin_inset space ~
35005 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
35008 \begin_layout Standard
35009 You can specify in the dialog tab
35013 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
35018 \begin_inset space ~
35022 \begin_inset space ~
35026 \begin_inset space ~
35031 option allows long links to be split;
35034 \begin_inset space ~
35038 \begin_inset space ~
35042 \begin_inset space ~
35050 \begin_inset space ~
35055 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
35058 \begin_inset space ~
35063 colors the different links.
35064 The default colors are:
35067 \begin_layout Labeling
35068 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35073 for hyperlinks and URLs
35076 \begin_layout Labeling
35077 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35085 \begin_layout Labeling
35086 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35094 \begin_layout Standard
35095 but you can change these in the field
35100 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
35103 \begin_layout Standard
35106 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
35109 \begin_layout Standard
35114 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
35115 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
35116 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
35119 \begin_layout Standard
35124 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
35125 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
35126 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
35136 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
35137 when opening the PDF.
35139 \begin_inset space ~
35142 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
35143 \begin_inset space ~
35146 1 will only display the sections.
35149 \begin_layout Standard
35150 PDF properties are also used in this document.
35151 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
35157 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
35158 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35168 \begin_layout Section
35170 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35172 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35174 name "sec:TeX-Code"
35181 \begin_layout Subsection
35184 \begin_inset Index idx
35187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35195 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35197 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
35204 \begin_layout Standard
35205 As \SpecialChar LyX
35206 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
35207 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
35208 commands and constructs,
35211 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
35212 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
35213 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
35214 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
35215 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
35216 cannot support all packages and
35220 \begin_layout Standard
35221 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
35222 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
35223 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
35227 Code box is created by the menu
35229 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35231 \begin_inset space ~
35236 or by the toolbar button
35249 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
35257 \begin_layout Standard
35258 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
35260 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
35262 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
35266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35267 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
35272 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35279 , you can write the command part
35285 in a \SpecialChar TeX
35286 Code box before the word and the closing brace
35290 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
35291 Code box behind the word.
35292 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
35293 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
35297 \begin_layout Standard
35298 \begin_inset Graphics
35299 filename clipart/ERT.png
35307 \begin_layout Standard
35311 \begin_layout Standard
35312 This is a line with a
35316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35339 \begin_layout Standard
35340 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35348 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
35349 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
35350 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
35351 know that the command is finished.
35359 \begin_layout Subsection
35360 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35362 \begin_inset Argument 1
35365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35366 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
35373 \begin_inset Index idx
35376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35384 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35386 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
35393 \begin_layout Standard
35394 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
35395 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35396 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
35397 uses in the background.
35398 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
35399 is based on commands, you can
35400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35408 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
35409 any time if you know the right commands.
35410 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
35411 is the end of the day.
35412 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
35413 all caption labels bold.
35414 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
35416 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
35420 \begin_layout Standard
35421 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
35423 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
35425 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35428 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35438 \begin_layout Standard
35439 As result you find that the package
35444 \begin_inset Index idx
35447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35455 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
35457 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35460 \SpecialChar menuseparator
35464 \begin_inset space ~
35472 \begin_layout Standard
35477 usepackage[options]{package name}
35480 \begin_layout Standard
35481 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
35482 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
35483 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
35484 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
35487 \begin_layout Standard
35488 In your case the package name is
35493 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
35498 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
35499 So you add the command
35502 \begin_layout Standard
35507 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
35510 \begin_layout Standard
35511 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
35515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35516 For more commands provided by the
35520 package, have a look at its documentation,
35521 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35536 \begin_layout Standard
35537 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
35539 For example if you use a
35543 class, you don't need the package
35547 , you can instead write
35550 \begin_layout Standard
35555 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
35560 \begin_layout Standard
35561 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
35562 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
35563 documentation of the document class you want to use.
35570 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
35573 \begin_layout Standard
35574 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
35575 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
35577 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
35578 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
35579 Code box as described in the previous
35583 \begin_layout Standard
35584 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
35585 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35588 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35590 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
35598 \begin_layout Standard
35599 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
35605 \begin_layout Standard
35609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35619 \begin_inset Note Note
35622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35623 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
35631 \begin_layout Left Header
35632 \begin_inset Argument 1
35635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35655 \begin_inset Note Note
35658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35659 defines the header line as described below
35667 \begin_layout Center Header
35668 \begin_inset Argument 1
35671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35680 \begin_layout Right Header
35681 \begin_inset Argument 1
35684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35705 \begin_layout Left Footer
35706 \begin_inset Argument 1
35709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35730 \begin_layout Center Footer
35731 \begin_inset Argument 1
35734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35746 \begin_inset Newline newline
35750 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
35756 \begin_layout Right Footer
35757 \begin_inset Argument 1
35760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35782 \begin_layout Section
35783 Customized Page Headers and Footers
35784 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35786 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
35791 \begin_inset Index idx
35794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35795 Document ! Header/Footer line
35801 \begin_inset Index idx
35804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35813 \begin_layout Standard
35814 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
35818 \begin_inset space ~
35829 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35835 \begin_inset space ~
35841 As a second step add in the menu
35843 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35844 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35848 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35853 Custom Header/Footerlines
35856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35860 This module offers the following 6
35861 \begin_inset space ~
35867 \begin_layout Description
35869 \begin_inset space ~
35873 \begin_inset space ~
35877 \begin_inset space ~
35881 \begin_inset space ~
35885 \begin_inset space ~
35891 \begin_layout Description
35893 \begin_inset space ~
35897 \begin_inset space ~
35901 \begin_inset space ~
35905 \begin_inset space ~
35909 \begin_inset space ~
35915 \begin_layout Standard
35916 for the different positions in the header/footer.
35917 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
35920 \begin_layout Standard
35921 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
35922 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
35924 \begin_inset space ~
35928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35930 reference "fig:Page-layout"
35934 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
35937 \begin_layout Standard
35938 \begin_inset Float figure
35945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35948 \begin_inset Tabular
35949 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
35950 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
35951 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35952 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35953 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35955 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
35967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35973 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35984 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36002 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36013 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
36016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36017 The normal text on the page goes here.
36018 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
36020 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
36021 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
36026 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36035 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36046 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36064 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36075 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
36087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36093 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36111 \begin_inset Caption Standard
36113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36114 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36116 name "fig:Page-layout"
36120 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
36133 \begin_layout Standard
36134 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36142 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
36146 \begin_inset space ~
36151 is set to “Default”.
36152 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
36161 \begin_layout Subsection
36165 \begin_layout Standard
36166 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
36167 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
36168 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
36169 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
36171 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
36173 Defining the footer line works similarly.
36176 \begin_layout Standard
36177 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
36178 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
36182 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36184 \begin_inset space ~
36192 \begin_layout Description
36195 thepage prints the current page number
36198 \begin_layout Description
36201 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
36204 \begin_layout Description
36207 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
36210 \begin_layout Description
36213 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
36214 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
36217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36221 \begin_inset Quotes prd
36224 because it usually goes in a left header.
36227 \begin_layout Description
36230 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
36231 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
36233 It is normally used in the right header.
36236 \begin_layout Subsection
36237 Default header/footer
36240 \begin_layout Standard
36241 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
36242 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
36243 footer has the page number.
36244 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
36245 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
36246 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
36249 \begin_inset space ~
36257 \begin_layout Subsection
36261 \begin_layout Standard
36262 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
36263 Some pages are different.
36264 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
36265 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
36266 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
36267 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
36268 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
36271 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36272 Header and footer decoration line
36275 \begin_layout Standard
36276 By default, you get a 0.4
36277 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36280 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
36281 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
36293 in the following way:
36296 \begin_layout Standard
36303 headrulewidth}{thickness}
36306 \begin_layout Standard
36307 where thickness is a size in standard units like
36320 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
36321 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36327 \begin_layout Standard
36328 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
36330 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
36331 \begin_inset space ~
36335 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36345 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36346 Several header/footer lines
36349 \begin_layout Standard
36350 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
36351 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
36352 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
36354 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36369 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36370 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36372 \begin_inset space ~
36380 \begin_layout Standard
36387 headheight}{height}
36390 \begin_layout Standard
36395 is a size in standard units (e.
36396 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36400 \begin_inset space \space{}
36408 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
36409 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
36410 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36411 logfile with the menu
36413 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36415 \begin_inset space ~
36423 \begin_inset space ~
36428 to see if you can find a warning about the package
36433 \begin_inset Index idx
36436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36438 packages ! fancyhdr
36444 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
36445 for your header/footer.
36448 \begin_layout Subsection
36452 \begin_layout Standard
36453 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
36454 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
36455 This example consists of the following definition:
36458 \begin_layout Description
36460 \begin_inset space ~
36469 , empty optional argument
36472 \begin_layout Description
36474 \begin_inset space ~
36477 Header empty, empty optional argument
36480 \begin_layout Description
36482 \begin_inset space ~
36491 in the optional argument
36494 \begin_layout Description
36496 \begin_inset space ~
36505 in the optional argument
36508 \begin_layout Description
36510 \begin_inset space ~
36523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36527 \begin_inset Newline newline
36531 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
36535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36538 in the optional argument
36541 \begin_layout Description
36543 \begin_inset space ~
36552 , empty optional argument
36555 \begin_layout Description
36558 headrulewidth set to 2
36559 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36565 \begin_layout Standard
36566 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
36567 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
36573 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36583 \begin_layout Standard
36584 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
36590 \begin_layout Standard
36594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36598 pagestyle{headings}
36604 \begin_inset Note Note
36607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36608 switches back to page style with the default headings
36616 \begin_layout Section
36617 Previewing Snippets of your Document
36618 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36620 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36625 \begin_inset Index idx
36628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36635 \begin_inset Index idx
36638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36647 \begin_layout Standard
36649 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
36650 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
36651 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
36654 \begin_layout Subsection
36658 \begin_layout Standard
36659 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36665 \begin_inset Index idx
36668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36670 packages ! preview-latex
36675 (on some systems named simply
36680 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36682 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36689 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36691 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
36699 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
36700 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36701 -package are automatically
36702 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
36706 \begin_layout Subsection
36710 \begin_layout Standard
36711 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
36712 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
36714 activate the option
36717 \begin_inset space ~
36724 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36730 \begin_inset space ~
36734 \begin_inset space ~
36737 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
36744 \begin_inset space ~
36757 \begin_inset space ~
36762 is the multiplication factor for the size.
36765 \begin_layout Standard
36766 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
36771 \begin_inset space ~
36779 \begin_inset space ~
36787 \begin_layout Standard
36788 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
36789 and when you finish
36793 \begin_layout Standard
36794 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36802 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
36803 generated by activating the option
36806 \begin_inset space ~
36812 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
36820 \begin_layout Subsection
36821 Selected document parts
36824 \begin_layout Standard
36825 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
36826 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
36827 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
36828 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36830 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
36832 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36836 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
36837 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
36838 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
36841 \begin_layout Standard
36842 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36849 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36861 is explained in section
36863 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
36868 \begin_inset space ~
36878 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
36879 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
36880 the final rotated boxes,
36881 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
36882 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
36884 Here is the result:
36887 \begin_layout Standard
36888 \begin_inset Preview
36890 \begin_layout Standard
36895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36899 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
36905 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
36915 height_special "totalheight"
36920 backgroundcolor "none"
36923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36948 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
36954 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
36961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36976 \begin_layout Standard
36977 Previewing works also for colors.
36978 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36997 is explained in section
37004 \begin_inset space ~
37017 \begin_layout Standard
37018 \begin_inset Preview
37020 \begin_layout Standard
37024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37043 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
37048 This is text within a colored, framed box.
37052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37067 \begin_layout Standard
37068 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
37074 \begin_layout Standard
37075 If \SpecialChar LyX
37076 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
37077 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
37078 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
37079 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37080 packages in your document preamble that are required by
37081 the \SpecialChar TeX
37083 If \SpecialChar LyX
37084 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
37085 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
37087 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
37088 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
37089 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
37092 \begin_layout Subsection
37097 \begin_layout Standard
37098 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37099 source of the whole document or parts of it.
37102 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
37104 \begin_inset space ~
37109 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37111 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
37113 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
37114 's main window, then only this selection
37115 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
37116 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
37117 the source view window.
37122 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
37123 ; but note that if you have
37124 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
37126 not just the one which is open at the time.
37129 \begin_layout Section
37130 Advanced Find and Replace
37131 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37133 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
37138 \begin_inset Index idx
37141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37148 \begin_inset Index idx
37151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37160 \begin_layout Subsection
37164 \begin_layout Standard
37165 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
37166 allows for searching of complex,
37167 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
37169 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
37170 The key-features are:
37173 \begin_layout Itemize
37174 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
37175 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
37176 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
37180 \begin_layout Itemize
37181 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
37182 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
37183 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
37184 a section heading will only be found within section headings
37187 \begin_layout Itemize
37188 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
37189 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
37190 outside of mathematics environments
37193 \begin_layout Itemize
37194 Search may be widened to a specific
37199 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37203 \begin_inset space ~
37206 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
37207 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
37214 \begin_layout Itemize
37215 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
37216 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
37217 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37221 \begin_inset space ~
37224 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
37227 \begin_layout Subsection
37231 \begin_layout Standard
37232 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
37234 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37247 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
37250 ) or the toolbar button
37253 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
37259 Advanced Find and Replace
37264 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37268 \begin_layout Standard
37274 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
37278 \begin_inset space ~
37283 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
37286 arg "paragraph-break"
37290 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
37291 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
37295 arg "paragraph-break"
37298 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
37302 searches backwards.
37305 \begin_layout Standard
37309 \begin_inset space ~
37314 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
37323 \begin_inset space ~
37328 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
37331 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37332 Searching for mathematics
37335 \begin_layout Standard
37336 Mathematical formulas, such as
37337 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
37340 or something more complex like
37341 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
37344 , may be searched for by typing them in the
37349 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
37350 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
37351 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
37352 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
37358 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37362 \begin_layout Standard
37363 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
37364 This is done by switching to the
37368 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
37373 This way, entering in the
37380 \begin_layout Itemize
37381 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
37382 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
37385 \begin_layout Itemize
37386 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
37387 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
37390 \begin_layout Itemize
37391 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
37392 of it only within section headings.
37393 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
37394 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
37398 \begin_layout Itemize
37399 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
37400 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
37403 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37407 \begin_layout Standard
37408 The entries made in the
37412 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
37415 \begin_inset space ~
37421 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
37425 button or alternatively press
37428 arg "paragraph-break"
37435 while the cursor is in the
37438 \begin_inset space ~
37446 \begin_layout Standard
37447 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
37449 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
37453 \begin_layout Itemize
37454 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
37455 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
37456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37463 with its typewriter version
37464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37478 \begin_layout Itemize
37479 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
37481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37485 \begin_inset Formula $R$
37489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37497 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
37501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37504 (you may want to enable the
37507 \begin_inset space ~
37515 \begin_inset space ~
37520 options and disable the
37528 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
37529 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37533 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37536 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
37537 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
37541 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
37544 , or occurrences of
37545 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
37549 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
37555 \begin_layout Subsection
37559 \begin_layout Standard
37560 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
37564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37565 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
37567 \begin_inset CommandInset href
37569 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
37579 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
37585 This is done with the context menu
37587 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37588 Insert Regular Expression
37590 while the cursor is in the
37595 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
37596 expression matching rules
37600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37601 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
37604 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37608 \begin_inset space ~
37611 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
37612 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
37618 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
37619 same text in the document.
37620 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
37621 Examples of using such a feature may be:
37624 \begin_layout Enumerate
37625 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
37630 editor the fraction
37631 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
37635 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
37638 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
37639 fractions with the given denominator.
37642 \begin_layout Enumerate
37643 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
37655 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
37660 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
37661 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
37662 Also, by inserting a
37663 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
37666 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
37667 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
37670 \begin_layout Standard
37671 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
37672 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
37673 \begin_inset Formula $()$
37676 , and referring back to them through
37677 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
37681 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
37685 For example, try searching with the regexp
37686 \begin_inset Newline newline
37689 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
37692 \begin_inset Newline newline
37695 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
37698 \begin_layout Standard
37699 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
37702 \begin_layout Standard
37703 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37711 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
37712 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
37713 sub-expressions is absolute.
37715 \begin_inset space ~
37719 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
37722 always refers to the first occurrence of
37723 \begin_inset Formula $()$
37726 in all entered regexps.
37734 \begin_layout Section
37736 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37738 name "sec:Spellchecking"
37743 \begin_inset Index idx
37746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37755 \begin_layout Standard
37757 has a built-in spell checker.
37760 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37767 key or the toolbar button
37770 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
37773 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
37774 beginning of the currently selected text.
37775 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
37776 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
37777 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
37778 scrolled so that it is visible.
37779 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
37780 n, if any could be found.
37781 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
37785 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
37786 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
37789 \begin_layout Standard
37790 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
37793 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37797 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
37798 a different one at the top of the dialog.
37800 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
37801 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
37804 \begin_inset space ~
37812 arg "dialog-show character"
37815 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
37817 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
37820 \begin_layout Standard
37821 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
37822 can be downloaded from here:
37823 \begin_inset Newline newline
37827 \begin_inset Flex URL
37830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37832 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
37838 \begin_inset Newline newline
37842 \begin_inset space ~
37845 files for each language.
37846 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
37847 \begin_inset space ~
37850 files into \SpecialChar LyX
37851 's installation subfolder
37859 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
37861 \begin_inset Newline newline
37864 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
37865 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
37866 but in most cases these are
37882 is the language code.
37885 \begin_layout Subsection
37889 \begin_layout Standard
37892 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37893 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37895 \begin_inset space ~
37898 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37901 you can set the following things:
37904 \begin_layout Description
37906 \begin_inset space ~
37909 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
37910 should use for spell checking.
37911 Depending on your platform,
37921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37922 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
37923 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
37938 \begin_inset space ~
37941 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
37944 \begin_layout Description
37946 \begin_inset space ~
37949 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
37950 will always use the given language
37951 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
37954 \begin_layout Description
37956 \begin_inset space ~
37959 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
37961 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37965 \begin_inset space \space{}
37969 This should normally not be needed.
37972 \begin_layout Description
37974 \begin_inset space ~
37978 \begin_inset space ~
37981 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
37983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37993 \begin_layout Description
37995 \begin_inset space ~
37998 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
37999 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
38000 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
38001 appear in a context menu.
38002 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
38006 \begin_layout Description
38008 \begin_inset space ~
38012 \begin_inset space ~
38016 \begin_inset space ~
38019 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
38023 \begin_layout Section
38025 \begin_inset Index idx
38028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38035 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38037 name "sec:Thesaurus"
38044 \begin_layout Standard
38046 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
38047 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
38056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38057 \begin_inset CommandInset href
38059 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
38069 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
38071 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
38072 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
38073 which are available for many languages.
38076 \begin_layout Standard
38077 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
38078 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
38082 \begin_layout Subsection
38083 Setting up the thesaurus
38086 \begin_layout Standard
38095 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
38099 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
38104 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
38106 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38110 \begin_inset space ~
38118 For instance, the US English files are named:
38121 \begin_layout Itemize
38125 \begin_layout Itemize
38129 \begin_layout Standard
38138 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
38139 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
38142 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38143 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38144 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
38146 \begin_inset space ~
38151 ) to the path where they are installed.
38155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38156 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
38157 ies, typical locations are
38163 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
38167 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
38171 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
38174 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
38180 LibreOffice-<Version>
38187 On the Mac, the default location is
38189 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
38190 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
38191 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
38192 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
38193 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
38194 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
38202 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
38203 during the \SpecialChar LyX
38204 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
38208 \begin_layout Standard
38209 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
38210 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
38212 \begin_inset Newline newline
38216 \begin_inset Flex URL
38219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38221 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
38229 \begin_layout Standard
38230 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
38231 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
38233 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38234 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38235 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
38237 \begin_inset space ~
38242 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
38244 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
38245 and point \SpecialChar LyX
38249 \begin_layout Standard
38250 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
38252 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
38255 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
38261 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
38264 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
38265 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
38267 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38273 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38274 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38275 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
38277 \begin_inset space ~
38282 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
38285 \begin_layout Subsection
38286 Using the thesaurus
38289 \begin_layout Standard
38290 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
38292 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38295 or the toolbar button
38298 arg "thesaurus-entry"
38301 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
38303 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
38305 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
38306 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
38307 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
38316 ), related terms (such as
38319 \begin_inset space ~
38328 ), compounds (such as
38331 \begin_inset space ~
38340 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
38349 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
38352 \begin_layout Standard
38353 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
38354 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
38358 \begin_layout Standard
38359 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
38360 the dictionary, such as the above
38364 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
38365 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38369 \begin_inset space \space{}
38372 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
38373 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
38374 For example, looking up the word form
38378 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
38383 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
38384 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38388 \begin_inset space \space{}
38399 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
38400 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
38401 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
38404 \begin_layout Section
38406 \begin_inset Index idx
38409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38416 \begin_inset Index idx
38419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38420 Document ! Change Tracking
38426 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38428 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
38435 \begin_layout Standard
38436 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
38437 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
38438 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
38439 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
38441 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38443 \begin_inset space ~
38446 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38448 \begin_inset space ~
38456 \begin_layout Standard
38457 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
38471 The color depends on the author that made the change.
38472 You can change the color in
38474 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38475 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38477 \begin_inset space ~
38481 \begin_inset space ~
38486 \SpecialChar menuseparator
38492 \begin_inset Index idx
38495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38496 Color ! Change tracking
38501 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
38502 's status bar when the
38503 cursor is in changed text.
38504 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
38507 arg "changes-merge"
38513 \begin_layout Standard
38514 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
38516 \begin_inset Index idx
38519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38528 \begin_layout Standard
38529 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38535 \begin_layout Standard
38536 \begin_inset Graphics
38537 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
38545 \begin_layout Standard
38546 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38552 \begin_layout Standard
38553 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
38556 \begin_layout Standard
38557 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38563 \begin_layout Standard
38564 \begin_inset Tabular
38565 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
38566 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38567 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38568 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38569 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38578 arg "changes-track"
38586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38592 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38594 \begin_inset space ~
38597 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38599 \begin_inset space ~
38608 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38617 arg "changes-output"
38625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38631 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38633 \begin_inset space ~
38636 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38638 \begin_inset space ~
38642 \begin_inset space ~
38646 \begin_inset space ~
38655 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38676 Jumps to the next change
38682 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38691 arg "change-accept"
38699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38705 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38707 \begin_inset space ~
38710 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38712 \begin_inset space ~
38721 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38730 arg "change-reject"
38738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38744 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38746 \begin_inset space ~
38749 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38751 \begin_inset space ~
38760 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38769 arg "changes-merge"
38777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38783 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38785 \begin_inset space ~
38788 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38790 \begin_inset space ~
38799 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38808 arg "all-changes-accept"
38816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38822 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38824 \begin_inset space ~
38827 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38829 \begin_inset space ~
38833 \begin_inset space ~
38842 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38851 arg "all-changes-reject"
38859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38865 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38867 \begin_inset space ~
38870 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38872 \begin_inset space ~
38876 \begin_inset space ~
38885 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38908 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38909 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
38911 \begin_inset space ~
38920 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38943 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
38945 \begin_inset space ~
38961 \begin_layout Standard
38962 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38968 \begin_layout Standard
38969 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
38989 \begin_layout Standard
38990 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
38991 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
38992 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
38993 the next change after the current cursor position.
38994 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
38995 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
38996 step to the next change.
38997 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
39000 \begin_layout Standard
39001 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
39002 to describe a change.
39005 \begin_layout Standard
39007 \change_deleted -712698321 1577206802
39008 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39014 \begin_inset Index idx
39017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39025 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
39027 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39034 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39040 \begin_layout Section
39041 Comparison of Documents
39042 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39044 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
39049 \begin_inset Index idx
39052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39053 Comparison of documents
39061 \begin_layout Standard
39062 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
39065 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39069 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
39070 file with change tracking enabled showing the
39072 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
39074 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
39078 \begin_inset space ~
39082 \begin_inset space ~
39086 \begin_inset space ~
39095 \begin_inset space ~
39099 \begin_inset space ~
39103 \begin_inset space ~
39107 \begin_inset space ~
39111 \begin_inset space ~
39115 \begin_inset space ~
39120 enables the change tracking option
39123 \begin_inset space ~
39127 \begin_inset space ~
39131 \begin_inset space ~
39136 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
39139 \begin_layout Section
39140 International Support
39141 \begin_inset Index idx
39144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39145 International support
39153 \begin_layout Standard
39154 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
39155 with any language you want.
39156 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
39157 up \SpecialChar LyX
39159 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39161 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
39169 \begin_layout Standard
39170 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
39171 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
39172 \begin_inset space ~
39176 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39178 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
39185 \begin_layout Subsection
39187 \begin_inset Index idx
39190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39197 \begin_inset Index idx
39200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39201 Document ! Settings
39207 \begin_inset Index idx
39210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39211 Document ! Language
39219 \begin_layout Standard
39222 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39223 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39226 dialog lets you set
39228 the language, the quote style and character encoding
39233 \begin_layout Standard
39238 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
39243 \begin_inset space ~
39248 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
39249 For details about the different encoding options see section
39250 \begin_inset space ~
39254 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39256 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
39263 \begin_layout Subsection
39264 Keyboard mapping configuration
39265 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39267 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
39274 \begin_layout Standard
39275 If you have for example a U.
39276 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39279 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
39280 can use an alternate keymap.
39281 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
39286 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39287 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39288 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
39291 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
39292 \begin_inset space ~
39296 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39298 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
39303 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
39304 which one you want to use.
39307 \begin_layout Standard
39308 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
39309 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
39310 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
39311 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39314 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
39315 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
39316 one to support the characters you want.
39317 This and many other customizations are explained in the
39324 \begin_layout Chapter
39327 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39329 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
39336 \begin_layout Standard
39337 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
39338 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
39339 topic inside the user's guide.
39342 \begin_layout Section
39344 \begin_inset Index idx
39347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39356 \begin_layout Standard
39361 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
39364 \begin_layout Subsection
39368 \begin_layout Standard
39369 Creates a new document.
39372 \begin_layout Subsection
39376 \begin_layout Standard
39377 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
39378 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
39379 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
39381 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353209
39382 Furthermore, templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring
39388 \begin_layout Subsection
39392 \begin_layout Standard
39396 \begin_layout Subsection
39400 \begin_layout Standard
39401 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
39402 Click there on a file to open it.
39405 \begin_layout Subsection
39407 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352812
39411 \begin_layout Standard
39413 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352848
39414 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
39418 \begin_layout Subsection
39422 \begin_layout Standard
39423 Closes the current document.
39426 \begin_layout Subsection
39430 \begin_layout Standard
39431 Closes all opened documents.
39434 \begin_layout Subsection
39438 \begin_layout Standard
39439 Saves the actual document.
39442 \begin_layout Subsection
39446 \begin_layout Standard
39447 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
39448 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352868
39452 \begin_layout Subsection
39454 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352875
39458 \begin_layout Standard
39460 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352904
39461 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use
39467 \begin_layout Subsection
39471 \begin_layout Standard
39472 Saves all opened documents.
39475 \begin_layout Subsection
39479 \begin_layout Standard
39480 Reloads the actual document from disk.
39483 \begin_layout Subsection
39487 \begin_layout Standard
39488 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
39489 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
39490 It is described in the section
39492 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
39497 Additional Features
39502 \begin_layout Subsection
39506 \begin_layout Standard
39507 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
39508 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
39510 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
39511 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
39515 \begin_layout Standard
39516 When using the menu entry
39519 \begin_inset space ~
39524 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
39528 \begin_inset space ~
39532 \begin_inset space ~
39536 \begin_inset space ~
39541 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
39542 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
39545 \begin_layout Subsection
39547 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39549 name "subsec:Export"
39556 \begin_layout Standard
39557 You can export your document to various file formats.
39558 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
39560 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
39561 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
39562 during its configuration.
39565 \begin_layout Standard
39566 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
39568 \begin_inset space ~
39572 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39574 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
39581 \begin_layout Description
39587 \begin_inset space ~
39590 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
39592 \begin_inset space ~
39595 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
39596 \begin_inset Newline newline
39599 Since \SpecialChar LyX
39600 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
39604 \begin_layout Description
39605 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
39611 \begin_layout Description
39613 \begin_inset space ~
39616 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
39622 \begin_layout Description
39623 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
39624 's native DVI-format.
39625 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
39626 files paths or file names in your document.
39628 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
39635 \begin_layout Description
39636 DVI DVI-format that also allows the usage of special characters or spaces
39637 in files paths or file names
39640 \begin_layout Description
39642 \begin_inset space ~
39649 ) DVI-format using the program
39651 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39654 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
39658 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39666 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
39674 \begin_layout Description
39676 \begin_inset space ~
39679 (cropped) the same as
39683 but with cropped page margins.
39686 \begin_layout Description
39688 \begin_inset space ~
39691 Dot text file with code in the programming language
39695 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
39700 \begin_layout Description
39704 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39712 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
39720 \begin_layout Description
39722 \begin_inset space ~
39726 \begin_inset space ~
39729 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
39733 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
39741 \begin_layout Description
39745 \begin_inset space ~
39754 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39755 source that is compilable with the program
39757 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39761 \begin_layout Description
39765 \begin_inset space ~
39770 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39771 source, additionally all images used in the document
39772 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
39776 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
39779 \begin_layout Description
39783 \begin_inset space ~
39788 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39789 source code, additionally all images used in the document
39790 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
39798 \begin_layout Description
39802 \begin_inset space ~
39811 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39812 source that is compilable with the program
39818 \begin_layout Description
39820 \begin_inset space ~
39824 \begin_inset space ~
39831 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39832 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
39838 \begin_layout Description
39840 \begin_inset space ~
39843 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
39844 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
39846 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39850 \begin_inset space \space{}
39855 \begin_inset space ~
39859 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39863 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39867 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39871 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39874 represent the version number)
39877 \begin_layout Description
39879 \begin_inset space ~
39883 \begin_inset space ~
39886 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
39887 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
39888 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39892 \begin_layout Description
39893 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
39894 's internal XHTML engine
39897 \begin_layout Description
39899 \begin_inset space ~
39903 \begin_inset space ~
39907 \begin_inset space ~
39911 \begin_inset space ~
39914 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
39919 For the conversion the program
39928 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39931 \begin_layout Description
39932 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
39937 \begin_layout Description
39939 \begin_inset space ~
39942 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
39944 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
39947 For the conversion the program
39956 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39959 \begin_layout Description
39961 \begin_inset space ~
39964 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
39965 For the conversion the program
39974 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39977 \begin_layout Description
39979 \begin_inset space ~
39982 (cropped) the same as
39985 \begin_inset space ~
39990 but with cropped page margins
39993 \begin_layout Description
39997 \begin_inset space ~
40002 PDF-format using the program
40006 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
40009 \begin_layout Description
40013 \begin_inset space ~
40017 \begin_inset space ~
40025 \begin_inset space ~
40030 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
40031 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40035 \begin_inset space \space{}
40038 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
40042 \begin_layout Description
40046 \begin_inset space ~
40051 PDF-format using the program
40053 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40056 , produces PDF-files directly
40059 \begin_layout Description
40063 \begin_inset space ~
40068 PDF-format using the program
40072 , produces PDF-files directly
40075 \begin_layout Description
40079 \begin_inset space ~
40084 PDF-format using the program
40088 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
40091 \begin_layout Description
40095 \begin_inset space ~
40100 PDF-format using the program
40105 , produces PDF-files directly
40108 \begin_layout Description
40112 \begin_inset space ~
40120 \begin_layout Description
40124 \begin_inset space ~
40128 \begin_inset space ~
40133 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
40134 and then exported as text using the program
40139 \begin_layout Description
40144 PostScript format using the program
40152 options see section
40153 \begin_inset space ~
40157 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40159 reference "subsec:General-output"
40166 \begin_layout Description
40167 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40168 source and also code in the statistical programming
40182 it is possible to use
40186 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
40190 \begin_layout Standard
40191 If one of the menu entries
40198 \begin_inset space ~
40207 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40209 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
40211 \begin_inset space ~
40215 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40217 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40222 \begin_inset Index idx
40225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40226 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40235 \begin_layout Subsection
40239 \begin_layout Standard
40240 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
40241 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
40244 \begin_inset space ~
40248 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40250 reference "sec:Paths"
40255 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
40264 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
40265 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
40266 's preferences as described in section
40267 \begin_inset space ~
40271 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40273 reference "subsec:Converters"
40280 \begin_layout Subsection
40281 New and Close Window
40284 \begin_layout Standard
40285 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
40289 \begin_layout Subsection
40293 \begin_layout Standard
40294 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
40297 \begin_layout Section
40299 \begin_inset Index idx
40302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40311 \begin_layout Subsection
40315 \begin_layout Standard
40316 Described in section
40317 \begin_inset space ~
40321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40323 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
40330 \begin_layout Subsection
40331 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
40334 \begin_layout Standard
40335 Described in section
40336 \begin_inset space ~
40340 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40342 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
40349 \begin_layout Subsection
40353 \begin_layout Standard
40354 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
40355 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
40358 \begin_layout Subsection
40362 \begin_layout Standard
40363 Selects the whole document.
40366 \begin_layout Subsection
40367 Find & Replace (Quick)
40370 \begin_layout Standard
40371 Described in section
40372 \begin_inset space ~
40376 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40378 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
40385 \begin_layout Subsection
40386 Find & Replace (Advanced)
40389 \begin_layout Standard
40390 Described in section
40391 \begin_inset space ~
40395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40397 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
40404 \begin_layout Subsection
40405 Move Paragraph Up/Down
40408 \begin_layout Standard
40409 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
40413 \begin_layout Subsection
40415 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
40419 \begin_layout Standard
40421 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
40422 Described in section
40423 \begin_inset space ~
40427 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40429 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
40438 \begin_layout Subsection
40440 \begin_inset Index idx
40443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40444 Paragraph ! Settings
40452 \begin_layout Standard
40453 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
40454 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
40458 \begin_layout Standard
40459 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
40460 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
40466 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40467 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40469 \begin_inset space ~
40475 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
40479 \begin_layout Subsection
40481 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
40485 \begin_layout Standard
40487 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
40488 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text
40493 \begin_layout Enumerate
40495 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
40496 Customize text properties by means of the
40502 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
40505 ; this is described in section
40506 \begin_inset space ~
40510 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40512 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
40519 \begin_layout Enumerate
40521 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
40522 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
40524 Apply last settings
40527 \begin_layout Enumerate
40529 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
40530 Change the casing of selected text (
40545 \begin_layout Subsection
40547 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
40551 \begin_layout Standard
40553 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
40554 This sub-menu only appears the document class or a module provides custom
40555 text styles (in the case of this document:
40577 \begin_inset space ~
40581 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40583 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
40592 \begin_layout Subsection
40593 Table and Rows & Columns
40596 \begin_layout Standard
40597 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
40598 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
40599 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
40602 \begin_layout Subsection
40606 \begin_layout Standard
40607 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
40608 It will dissolve this inset.
40609 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
40613 \begin_layout Subsection
40617 \begin_layout Standard
40618 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
40619 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
40622 \begin_layout Subsection
40623 Increase/Decrease List Depth
40626 \begin_layout Standard
40627 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
40629 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
40630 \begin_inset space ~
40634 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40636 reference "sec:Nesting"
40641 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40643 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
40650 \begin_layout Section
40652 \begin_inset Index idx
40655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40664 \begin_layout Standard
40665 At the bottom of the
40669 menu the opened documents are listed.
40672 \begin_layout Subsection
40673 Open/Close all Insets
40676 \begin_layout Standard
40677 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
40680 \begin_layout Subsection
40681 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
40684 \begin_layout Standard
40685 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
40688 \begin_layout Standard
40689 Math macros are described in the
40696 \begin_layout Subsection
40700 \begin_layout Standard
40701 Shows the outline window as described in sections
40702 \begin_inset space ~
40706 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40708 reference "sec:Navigating"
40713 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40715 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
40722 \begin_layout Subsection
40726 \begin_layout Standard
40727 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
40729 \begin_inset space ~
40733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40735 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
40742 \begin_layout Subsection
40746 \begin_layout Standard
40747 Opens a window showing console messages.
40748 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
40750 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40753 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
40754 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
40755 is processing the document.
40758 \begin_layout Subsection
40760 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40762 name "subsec:Toolbars"
40767 \begin_inset Index idx
40770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40779 \begin_layout Standard
40780 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
40782 All toolbars and the
40785 \begin_inset space ~
40790 can be turned on and off.
40795 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
40807 \begin_inset space ~
40819 \begin_inset space ~
40824 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
40828 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
40835 \begin_layout Standard
40840 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
40844 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
40845 or when a certain feature is enabled.
40846 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
40847 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
40848 is inside a formula or table respectively.
40851 \begin_layout Standard
40853 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
40854 \begin_inset space ~
40858 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40860 reference "sec:Toolbars"
40867 \begin_layout Subsection
40871 \begin_layout Standard
40875 \begin_inset space ~
40879 \begin_inset space ~
40883 \begin_inset space ~
40887 \begin_inset space ~
40891 \begin_inset space ~
40895 \begin_inset space ~
40900 will split \SpecialChar LyX
40901 's main window vertically while
40904 \begin_inset space ~
40908 \begin_inset space ~
40912 \begin_inset space ~
40916 \begin_inset space ~
40920 \begin_inset space ~
40924 \begin_inset space ~
40929 will split it horizontally.
40930 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
40931 to view the same document, but at different positions.
40932 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
40933 three or more documents at the same time.
40934 To close a split view, use the menu
40937 \begin_inset space ~
40941 \begin_inset space ~
40949 \begin_layout Subsection
40953 \begin_layout Standard
40954 Closes a split view.
40957 \begin_layout Subsection
40961 \begin_layout Standard
40962 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
40963 so that you will see nothing but your text.
40964 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
40965 's main window fullscreen.
40966 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
40967 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
40970 \begin_layout Section
40972 \begin_inset Index idx
40975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40984 \begin_layout Subsection
40988 \begin_layout Standard
40989 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
40990 \begin_inset space ~
40994 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40996 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
41007 \begin_layout Subsection
41009 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41011 name "subsec:Special-Character"
41018 \begin_layout Standard
41019 Here you can insert the following characters:
41022 \begin_layout Description
41027 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
41030 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
41031 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41032 -packages you have installed.
41033 You can get a complete display by checking
41036 \begin_inset space ~
41042 \begin_inset Newline newline
41046 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41054 Not all characters will be visible in the
41058 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
41059 dialog (see section
41060 \begin_inset space ~
41064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41066 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
41070 ) can display every character.
41078 \begin_layout Description
41079 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
41083 \begin_layout Description
41085 \begin_inset space ~
41089 \begin_inset space ~
41092 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
41093 \begin_inset space ~
41097 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41099 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
41106 \begin_layout Description
41108 \begin_inset space ~
41111 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
41114 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41115 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41121 \begin_layout Description
41123 \begin_inset space ~
41126 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
41129 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41130 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41136 \begin_layout Description
41138 \begin_inset space ~
41141 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
41145 \begin_layout Description
41147 \begin_inset space ~
41150 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
41154 \begin_layout Description
41156 \begin_inset space ~
41160 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482504
41161 Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when pressing
41167 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
41172 Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
41174 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41178 \begin_inset space \space{}
41181 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
41182 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
41188 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41191 To insert a fraction use the command
41196 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
41200 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
41206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41209 The visible space is hereby the character before the
41216 \begin_layout Description
41218 \begin_inset space ~
41221 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
41225 \begin_layout Description
41227 \begin_inset space ~
41231 \begin_inset Index idx
41234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41241 \begin_inset Index idx
41244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41245 Language ! Phonetic symbols
41250 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
41251 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
41253 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41259 \begin_inset Index idx
41262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41270 \begin_inset Newline newline
41273 More information about this feature can be found in the
41279 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
41285 \begin_layout Description
41286 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
41288 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
41289 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
41293 \begin_layout Subsection
41297 \begin_layout Standard
41298 Opens a submenu with the following options:
41301 \begin_layout Description
41302 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
41303 \begin_inset script superscript
41305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41314 \begin_layout Description
41315 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
41316 \begin_inset script subscript
41318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41327 \begin_layout Description
41329 \begin_inset space ~
41332 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
41333 \begin_inset space ~
41337 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41339 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
41346 \begin_layout Description
41348 \begin_inset space ~
41351 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
41352 \begin_inset space ~
41356 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41358 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
41365 \begin_layout Description
41367 \begin_inset space ~
41370 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
41371 \begin_inset space ~
41375 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41377 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
41384 \begin_layout Description
41386 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482457
41388 \begin_inset space ~
41391 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
41393 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41397 \begin_inset space \space{}
41400 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
41401 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
41407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41410 To insert a fraction use the command
41415 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
41419 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
41425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41428 The visible space is hereby the character before the
41437 \begin_layout Description
41439 \begin_inset space ~
41442 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
41443 \begin_inset space ~
41447 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41449 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
41456 \begin_layout Description
41458 \begin_inset space ~
41461 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
41462 \begin_inset space ~
41466 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41468 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
41475 \begin_layout Description
41477 \begin_inset space ~
41480 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
41481 \begin_inset space ~
41485 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41487 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
41494 \begin_layout Description
41495 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
41496 \begin_inset space ~
41500 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41502 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
41509 \begin_layout Description
41511 \begin_inset space ~
41514 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
41515 \begin_inset space ~
41519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41521 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
41528 \begin_layout Description
41530 \begin_inset space ~
41533 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
41534 \begin_inset space ~
41538 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41540 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
41547 \begin_layout Description
41549 \begin_inset space ~
41553 \begin_inset space ~
41556 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
41559 \begin_inset space ~
41563 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41565 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
41572 for a usage example.
41575 \begin_layout Description
41577 \begin_inset space ~
41581 \begin_inset space ~
41584 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
41585 \begin_inset space ~
41589 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41591 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
41598 \begin_layout Description
41600 \begin_inset space ~
41603 Break Inserts a forced line break that
41604 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482910
41607 justifies the remaining text as described in section
41608 \begin_inset space ~
41612 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41614 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
41621 \begin_layout Description
41623 \begin_inset space ~
41626 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
41627 \begin_inset space ~
41631 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41633 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
41640 \begin_layout Description
41642 \begin_inset space ~
41645 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
41646 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
41648 \begin_inset space ~
41652 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41654 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
41661 \begin_layout Description
41663 \begin_inset space ~
41666 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
41667 \begin_inset space ~
41671 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41673 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
41680 \begin_layout Description
41682 \begin_inset space ~
41686 \begin_inset space ~
41689 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
41690 \begin_inset space ~
41694 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41696 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
41703 \begin_layout Subsection
41705 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459357
41709 \begin_layout Standard
41711 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459959
41712 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
41713 The submenu allows you to insert
41716 \begin_layout Description
41718 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460018
41720 \begin_inset space ~
41723 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
41726 \begin_layout Description
41728 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460347
41730 \begin_inset space ~
41734 \begin_inset space ~
41737 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last
41741 \begin_layout Description
41743 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647074
41745 \begin_inset space ~
41748 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
41751 \begin_layout Description
41753 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647089
41755 \begin_inset space ~
41758 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
41761 \begin_layout Description
41763 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647093
41765 \begin_inset space ~
41769 \begin_inset space ~
41772 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last
41776 \begin_layout Description
41778 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647133
41780 \begin_inset space ~
41783 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
41786 \begin_layout Description
41788 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647170
41790 \begin_inset space ~
41794 \begin_inset space ~
41798 \begin_inset space ~
41801 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
41804 \begin_layout Description
41806 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647240
41808 \begin_inset space ~
41811 Name inserts the user name as specified in
41813 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41814 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41820 \begin_layout Description
41822 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647259
41824 \begin_inset space ~
41827 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
41829 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41830 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41836 \begin_layout Description
41838 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460561
41839 Other\SpecialChar ldots
41840 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three
41841 date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
41844 \begin_layout Subsection
41847 List/Contents/References
41850 \begin_layout Standard
41851 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
41855 \begin_inset space ~
41876 are described in section
41877 \begin_inset space ~
41881 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41883 reference "sec:toc"
41892 is described in section
41893 \begin_inset space ~
41897 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41899 reference "sec:Index"
41907 is described in section
41908 \begin_inset space ~
41912 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41914 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
41920 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
41923 is described in section
41924 \begin_inset space ~
41928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41930 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
41937 \begin_layout Subsection
41941 \begin_layout Standard
41942 To insert floats, as described in section
41943 \begin_inset space ~
41947 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41949 reference "sec:Floats"
41953 and in detail the chapter
41960 \begin_inset space ~
41968 \begin_layout Subsection
41972 \begin_layout Standard
41973 To insert notes, described in section
41974 \begin_inset space ~
41978 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41980 reference "sec:Notes"
41987 \begin_layout Subsection
41991 \begin_layout Standard
41992 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
41994 Branches are described in section
41995 \begin_inset space ~
41999 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42001 reference "sec:Branches"
42008 \begin_layout Subsection
42012 \begin_layout Standard
42013 Inserts document class-specific insets.
42014 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
42016 An example is the document class
42017 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354540
42019 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42027 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354543
42031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42036 with three custom insets.
42039 Flex insets and InsetLayout
42043 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
42049 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
42052 \begin_layout Subsection
42054 \begin_inset Index idx
42057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42066 \begin_layout Standard
42067 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
42069 For more information see chapter
42071 External Document Parts
42074 \begin_inset space ~
42080 \begin_layout Subsection
42082 \begin_inset Index idx
42085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42094 \begin_layout Standard
42095 Inserts a box in a certain style.
42096 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
42103 \begin_inset space ~
42111 \begin_layout Subsection
42115 \begin_layout Standard
42120 dialog as described in section
42121 \begin_inset space ~
42125 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42127 reference "sec:Bibliography"
42134 \begin_layout Subsection
42138 \begin_layout Standard
42143 as described in section
42144 \begin_inset space ~
42148 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42150 reference "sec:Cross-References"
42157 \begin_layout Subsection
42161 \begin_layout Standard
42166 as described in section
42167 \begin_inset space ~
42171 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42173 reference "sec:Cross-References"
42180 \begin_layout Subsection
42182 \begin_inset Index idx
42185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42192 \begin_inset Index idx
42195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42196 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
42204 \begin_layout Standard
42205 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
42206 Floats are described in section
42207 \begin_inset space ~
42211 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42213 reference "sec:Floats"
42217 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
42220 \change_inserted -712698321 1590482693
42228 \begin_inset space ~
42236 \begin_layout Subsection
42240 \begin_layout Standard
42241 Inserts an index entry as described in section
42242 \begin_inset space ~
42246 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42248 reference "sec:Index"
42255 \begin_layout Subsection
42259 \begin_layout Standard
42260 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
42261 \begin_inset space ~
42265 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42267 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
42274 \begin_layout Subsection
42278 \begin_layout Standard
42279 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
42280 Tables are described in section
42281 \begin_inset space ~
42285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42287 reference "sec:Tables"
42291 and in detail in the chapter
42298 \begin_inset space ~
42306 \begin_layout Subsection
42310 \begin_layout Standard
42316 Graphics are described in section
42317 \begin_inset space ~
42321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42323 reference "sec:Graphics"
42330 \begin_layout Subsection
42334 \begin_layout Standard
42335 Inserts a URL as described in section
42336 \begin_inset space ~
42340 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42342 reference "subsec:URLs"
42349 \begin_layout Subsection
42353 \begin_layout Standard
42354 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
42355 \begin_inset space ~
42359 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42361 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
42368 \begin_layout Subsection
42372 \begin_layout Standard
42373 Inserts a footnote as described in section
42374 \begin_inset space ~
42378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42380 reference "sec:Footnotes"
42387 \begin_layout Subsection
42391 \begin_layout Standard
42392 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
42393 \begin_inset space ~
42397 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42399 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
42406 \begin_layout Subsection
42409 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
42412 \begin_layout Standard
42413 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
42414 environments of the same type.
42416 \begin_inset space ~
42420 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42422 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
42426 for an explanation.
42429 \begin_layout Subsection
42433 \begin_layout Standard
42434 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
42435 title or caption of a float.
42436 Inserts a short title as described in section
42437 \begin_inset space ~
42441 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42443 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
42450 \begin_layout Subsection
42455 \begin_layout Standard
42456 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
42457 Code box as described in section
42458 \begin_inset space ~
42462 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42464 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
42471 \begin_layout Subsection
42473 \begin_inset Index idx
42476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42485 \begin_layout Standard
42486 Inserts a program listings box.
42487 Program listings are explained in the chapter
42489 Program Code Listings
42494 \begin_inset space ~
42502 \begin_layout Subsection
42504 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
42508 \begin_layout Standard
42510 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
42511 Inserts the actual date.
42512 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
42519 \begin_layout Subsection
42523 \begin_layout Standard
42524 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
42525 \begin_inset space ~
42529 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42531 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
42538 \begin_layout Section
42540 \begin_inset Index idx
42543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42552 \begin_layout Standard
42553 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
42554 \begin_inset space ~
42557 of the current document.
42558 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
42561 \begin_layout Subsection
42565 \begin_layout Standard
42566 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
42567 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
42568 to jump, for example, between section
42569 \begin_inset space ~
42573 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
42574 \begin_inset space ~
42577 2.5 and use the submenu
42580 \begin_inset space ~
42584 \begin_inset space ~
42591 \begin_inset space ~
42597 \begin_inset space ~
42601 \begin_inset space ~
42607 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
42611 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
42617 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
42620 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
42623 \begin_layout Standard
42624 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
42628 \begin_inset space ~
42633 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
42636 \begin_inset space ~
42641 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
42644 \begin_layout Subsection
42645 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
42648 \begin_layout Standard
42649 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
42653 \begin_layout Subsection
42657 \begin_layout Standard
42658 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
42659 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
42660 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
42664 \begin_inset space ~
42668 \begin_inset space ~
42676 \begin_layout Subsection
42680 \begin_layout Standard
42681 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
42684 The \SpecialChar LyX
42685 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
42687 \begin_inset space ~
42695 \begin_inset space ~
42700 manual for a detailed description.
42703 \begin_layout Section
42705 \begin_inset Index idx
42708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42717 \begin_layout Subsection
42721 \begin_layout Standard
42722 Change Tracking is described in section
42723 \begin_inset space ~
42727 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42729 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
42736 \begin_layout Subsection
42744 \begin_layout Standard
42745 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
42746 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
42747 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42749 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
42750 to the clipboard or update the view.
42751 \begin_inset Newline newline
42754 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42758 \begin_layout Standard
42761 Open Containing Directory
42763 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
42764 's temporary folder for the document.
42765 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
42766 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
42767 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
42768 For example some journals require to send the
42772 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
42776 \begin_layout Subsection
42777 Start Appendix Here
42780 \begin_layout Standard
42781 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
42782 as described in section
42783 \begin_inset space ~
42787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42789 reference "sec:Appendices"
42796 \begin_layout Subsection
42798 \begin_inset space ~
42804 \begin_layout Standard
42805 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
42806 default output format for the document (menu
42808 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42809 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42810 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42812 \begin_inset space ~
42816 \begin_inset space ~
42822 \begin_inset space ~
42826 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42828 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42832 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
42835 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42836 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42838 \begin_inset space ~
42841 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42843 \begin_inset space ~
42846 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42848 \begin_inset space ~
42852 \begin_inset space ~
42858 \begin_inset space ~
42862 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42864 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42868 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
42869 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
42871 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42872 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42874 \begin_inset space ~
42877 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42879 \begin_inset space ~
42882 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42886 \begin_inset space ~
42890 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42892 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42897 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
42898 when it is first configured.
42899 The default output format is
42902 \begin_inset space ~
42910 \begin_layout Subsection
42911 View (Other Formats)
42914 \begin_layout Standard
42915 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
42916 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
42917 actual document with an external program.
42918 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
42919 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42920 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
42922 All possible formats are listed in section
42923 \begin_inset space ~
42927 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42929 reference "subsec:Export"
42934 You should at least see the menu entry
42939 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42941 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
42943 \begin_inset space ~
42947 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42949 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
42954 \begin_inset Index idx
42957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42958 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42967 \begin_layout Standard
42968 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
42969 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
42971 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42972 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42974 \begin_inset space ~
42977 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42979 \begin_inset space ~
42982 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42986 \begin_inset space ~
42990 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42992 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42997 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
42998 when it is first configured.
43001 \begin_layout Subsection
43003 \begin_inset space ~
43009 \begin_layout Standard
43010 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
43011 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
43014 \begin_layout Subsection
43015 Update (Other Formats)
43018 \begin_layout Standard
43019 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
43020 your document without opening a new viewer window.
43023 \begin_layout Subsection
43024 View Master Document
43027 \begin_layout Standard
43028 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
43030 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43034 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43044 \begin_inset space ~
43049 manual for more information on this topic).
43050 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
43051 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
43055 \begin_inset space ~
43059 \begin_inset space ~
43064 generates the output of the whole book, while
43068 will just output the chapter alone.
43071 \begin_layout Standard
43072 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
43073 in the document settings (menu
43075 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43076 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43077 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
43079 \begin_inset space ~
43083 \begin_inset space ~
43089 \begin_inset space ~
43093 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43095 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
43099 ) or in the preferences (menu
43101 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43102 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43104 \begin_inset space ~
43107 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43109 \begin_inset space ~
43112 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43114 \begin_inset space ~
43118 \begin_inset space ~
43124 \begin_inset space ~
43128 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43130 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43137 \begin_layout Subsection
43138 Update Master Document
43141 \begin_layout Standard
43142 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
43144 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43158 \begin_inset space ~
43163 manual for more information on this topic).
43164 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
43165 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
43168 \begin_layout Standard
43169 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
43170 in the document settings (menu
43172 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43173 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43174 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
43176 \begin_inset space ~
43180 \begin_inset space ~
43186 \begin_inset space ~
43190 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43192 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
43196 ) or in the preferences (menu
43198 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43199 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43201 \begin_inset space ~
43204 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43206 \begin_inset space ~
43209 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43211 \begin_inset space ~
43215 \begin_inset space ~
43221 \begin_inset space ~
43225 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43227 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43234 \begin_layout Subsection
43236 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43238 name "subsec:Compressed"
43245 \begin_layout Standard
43246 Un/compresses the current document.
43247 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
43248 compression (see the
43250 Additional Features
43252 manual for details).
43255 \begin_layout Subsection
43259 \begin_layout Standard
43260 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
43263 \begin_layout Subsection
43267 \begin_layout Standard
43268 The document settings are described in appendix
43269 \begin_inset space ~
43273 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43275 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
43282 \begin_layout Section
43284 \begin_inset Index idx
43287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43296 \begin_layout Subsection
43300 \begin_layout Standard
43301 Spell checking is explained in section
43302 \begin_inset space ~
43306 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43308 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
43315 \begin_layout Subsection
43319 \begin_layout Standard
43320 The thesaurus is described in section
43321 \begin_inset space ~
43325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43327 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
43334 \begin_layout Subsection
43336 \begin_inset Index idx
43339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43346 \begin_inset Index idx
43349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43358 \begin_layout Standard
43359 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
43360 the highlighted document part.
43363 \begin_layout Subsection
43369 \begin_inset Index idx
43372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43373 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
43382 \begin_layout Standard
43383 Generates with the help of the program
43385 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
43388 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
43389 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
43390 This feature is not available on Windows.
43393 \begin_layout Subsection
43399 \begin_inset Index idx
43402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43412 \begin_layout Standard
43413 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43418 \begin_inset space ~
43423 to see the full filename paths.
43426 \begin_layout Subsection
43428 \begin_inset Index idx
43431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43440 \begin_layout Standard
43441 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
43442 files as described in section
43443 \begin_inset space ~
43447 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43449 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
43456 \begin_layout Subsection
43458 \begin_inset Index idx
43461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43474 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
43479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43492 \begin_inset Index idx
43495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43496 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
43505 \begin_layout Standard
43506 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
43507 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
43508 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43509 -packages and programs it needs; see
43511 \begin_inset space ~
43515 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43517 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
43524 \begin_layout Subsection
43528 \begin_layout Standard
43533 dialog as described in detail in appendix
43534 \begin_inset space ~
43538 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43540 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
43547 \begin_layout Section
43549 \begin_inset Index idx
43552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43561 \begin_layout Standard
43562 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
43563 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
43565 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
43569 \begin_layout Standard
43573 \begin_inset space ~
43578 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
43579 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43580 packages and classes found
43581 by \SpecialChar LyX
43583 \begin_inset space ~
43587 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43589 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
43596 \begin_layout Standard
43600 \begin_inset space ~
43605 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
43610 \begin_layout Section
43612 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43614 name "sec:Toolbars"
43621 \begin_layout Standard
43622 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
43623 \begin_inset space ~
43627 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43629 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
43636 \begin_layout Standard
43637 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
43638 This is described in the
43640 Additional Features
43645 \begin_layout Subsection
43647 \begin_inset Index idx
43650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43659 \begin_layout Standard
43660 \begin_inset Graphics
43661 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
43669 \begin_layout Standard
43670 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43676 \begin_layout Standard
43677 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
43682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43694 \begin_inset Note Note
43697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43698 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
43703 manual for more information.
43711 \begin_layout Standard
43712 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43718 \begin_layout Standard
43719 \begin_inset Tabular
43720 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
43721 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43722 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
43723 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
43725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43729 \begin_inset Graphics
43730 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
43740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43744 pull-down box for the environments
43757 \begin_layout Standard
43758 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
43764 \begin_layout Standard
43766 \begin_inset Tabular
43767 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
43768 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43769 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43770 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43771 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43794 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43801 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43824 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43831 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43854 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43861 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43870 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
43878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43884 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43891 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43900 arg "spelling-continuously"
43908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43912 Spellcheck continuously
43918 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43941 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43948 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43971 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43978 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44001 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44008 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44031 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44038 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44061 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44063 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905310
44068 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44077 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44086 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
44094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44100 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44102 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44106 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44110 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44119 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44126 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
44134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44140 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44142 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44146 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44150 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44159 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44168 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
44176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44182 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
44183 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
44190 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44211 Emphasize text, function of the
44212 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
44215 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44217 \begin_inset space ~
44220 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44222 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
44228 arg "dialog-show character"
44239 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44260 Set text to noun style, function of the
44261 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
44264 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44266 \begin_inset space ~
44269 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44271 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
44277 arg "dialog-show character"
44288 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44294 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900859
44297 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
44305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44310 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900930
44313 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44320 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44326 \change_deleted -712698321 1545899987
44331 arg "textstyle-apply"
44341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44346 \change_deleted -712698321 1545900001
44347 Format text using the current settings in the
44349 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44351 \begin_inset space ~
44354 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44365 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44388 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44389 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
44391 \begin_inset space ~
44400 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44409 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
44417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44423 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44430 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44437 arg "tabular-insert"
44445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44451 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44458 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44464 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900837
44467 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
44475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44480 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900953
44483 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44490 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44499 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
44507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44511 Toggle outline window on/off,
44513 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
44520 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44529 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
44537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44541 Toggle math toolbar on/off
44547 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44556 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
44564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44568 Toggle table toolbar on/off
44581 \begin_layout Subsection
44583 \begin_inset Index idx
44586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44595 \begin_layout Standard
44596 \begin_inset Graphics
44597 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
44605 \begin_layout Standard
44606 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44612 \begin_layout Standard
44613 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
44617 \begin_layout Standard
44618 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44624 \begin_layout Standard
44625 \begin_inset Tabular
44626 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
44627 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
44628 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44629 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44630 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44657 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44666 arg "layout-toggle Enumerate"
44674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44684 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44693 arg "layout-toggle Itemize"
44701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44711 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44720 arg "layout-toggle List"
44728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44738 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44747 arg "layout-toggle Description"
44755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44765 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44774 arg "depth-increment"
44782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44788 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44790 \begin_inset space ~
44794 \begin_inset space ~
44803 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44812 arg "depth-decrement"
44820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44826 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44828 \begin_inset space ~
44832 \begin_inset space ~
44841 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44850 arg "float-insert figure"
44858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44864 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44865 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
44872 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44881 arg "float-insert table"
44889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44895 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44896 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
44903 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44926 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44933 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44942 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
44950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44956 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44963 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44972 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
44980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44986 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44993 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45016 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45018 \begin_inset space ~
45027 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45036 arg "nomencl-insert"
45044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45050 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45052 \begin_inset space ~
45061 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45070 arg "footnote-insert"
45078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45084 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45091 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45100 arg "marginalnote-insert"
45108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45114 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45116 \begin_inset space ~
45125 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45148 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45149 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
45151 \begin_inset space ~
45160 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45169 arg "box-insert Frameless"
45177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45183 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45190 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45213 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45220 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45243 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45245 \begin_inset space ~
45254 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45263 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
45271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45277 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45278 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
45285 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45294 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
45302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45308 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45309 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45311 \begin_inset space ~
45320 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45329 arg "dialog-show character"
45337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45343 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45345 \begin_inset space ~
45348 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
45355 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45361 \change_inserted -712698321 1545899981
45366 arg "textstyle-apply"
45374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45379 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900045
45380 Format text using the recent settings in the
45383 arg "dialog-show character"
45392 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45401 arg "layout-paragraph"
45409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45415 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45417 \begin_inset space ~
45426 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45435 arg "thesaurus-entry"
45443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45449 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45463 \begin_layout Subsection
45464 View/Update Toolbar
45465 \begin_inset Index idx
45468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45469 Toolbar ! View / Update
45477 \begin_layout Standard
45478 \begin_inset Graphics
45479 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
45486 \begin_layout Standard
45487 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45493 \begin_layout Standard
45494 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
45498 \begin_layout Standard
45499 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45505 \begin_layout Standard
45506 \begin_inset Tabular
45507 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
45508 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
45509 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45510 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45511 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45534 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45541 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45550 arg "buffer-update"
45558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45564 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45571 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45580 arg "master-buffer-view"
45588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45594 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45596 \begin_inset space ~
45605 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45614 arg "master-buffer-update"
45622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45628 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45630 \begin_inset space ~
45634 \begin_inset space ~
45643 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45652 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
45660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45666 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45667 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45668 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
45669 Synchronize with Output
45675 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45686 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901299
45696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45702 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45703 View (Other Formats)
45709 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45716 arg "update-others"
45720 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901301
45728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45734 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45735 Update (Other Formats)
45748 \begin_layout Standard
45750 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901302
45751 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
45757 \begin_layout Subsection
45761 \begin_layout Standard
45762 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
45763 \begin_inset space ~
45767 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45769 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
45773 , the table toolbar
45774 \begin_inset Index idx
45777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45786 \begin_inset space ~
45791 manual and the math macro toolbar
45792 \begin_inset Index idx
45795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45808 \begin_layout Chapter
45809 The Document Settings
45810 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45812 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
45817 \begin_inset Index idx
45820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45821 Document ! Settings
45829 \begin_layout Standard
45833 \begin_inset space ~
45838 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
45839 is called with the menu
45841 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45845 You can save your document settings as default with the
45847 Save as Document Defaults
45849 button in any dialog.
45850 This will create a template named
45854 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
45855 when you create a new document without
45859 \begin_layout Standard
45864 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
45865 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
45868 \begin_layout Standard
45869 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
45870 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
45871 to find the one you are looking for.
45872 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
45873 the submenus of the dialog.
45875 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45879 \begin_inset space \space{}
45883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45890 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
45891 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
45892 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
45895 \begin_layout Section
45899 \begin_layout Standard
45900 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
45902 Document classes are described in section
45903 \begin_inset space ~
45907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45909 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
45917 \begin_layout Standard
45921 \begin_inset space ~
45926 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
45931 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
45932 as a layout for a document class.
45933 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
45935 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
45944 \begin_layout Standard
45945 Some classes use special class options by default.
45946 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
45950 and you can decide to use them or not.
45951 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
45952 recommended you leave them untouched.
45957 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45958 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
45963 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45965 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
45970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45971 When you want to use one of the following drivers
45972 \begin_inset Newline newline
45977 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
45980 \begin_inset Newline newline
45983 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45984 distribution, see section
45989 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45991 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
46004 \begin_layout Standard
46009 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
46010 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
46011 in the background if the child document
46012 is opened without its master.
46013 This way child documents are always compilable.
46014 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
46021 \begin_inset space ~
46029 \begin_layout Standard
46030 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46041 \begin_inset Index idx
46044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46046 packages ! prettyref
46052 \begin_inset Index idx
46055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46057 packages ! refstyle
46062 for cross-references, see section
46063 \begin_inset space ~
46067 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46069 reference "sec:Cross-References"
46076 \begin_layout Section
46080 \begin_layout Standard
46081 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
46082 Please refer to the section
46085 \begin_inset space ~
46093 \begin_inset space ~
46098 manual for details.
46101 \begin_layout Section
46105 \begin_layout Standard
46106 Modules are explained in section
46107 \begin_inset space ~
46111 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46113 reference "subsec:Modules"
46120 \begin_layout Section
46124 \begin_layout Standard
46126 \begin_inset space ~
46130 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46132 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
46139 \begin_layout Section
46143 \begin_layout Standard
46144 The document font settings are described in section
46145 \begin_inset space ~
46149 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46151 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
46158 \begin_layout Section
46162 \begin_layout Standard
46163 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
46175 \begin_inset space ~
46180 and whether it should be a
46183 \begin_inset space ~
46188 can also be specified here.
46191 \begin_layout Standard
46192 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
46193 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
46194 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
46196 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
46199 \begin_layout Standard
46202 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
46205 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
46206 justifies the text on screen.
46207 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
46209 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288869
46213 \begin_layout Standard
46215 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288904
46224 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
46229 \begin_layout Section
46233 \begin_layout Standard
46234 This dialog is described in sections
46235 \begin_inset space ~
46239 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46241 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
46246 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46248 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
46255 \begin_layout Section
46259 \begin_layout Standard
46260 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
46261 \begin_inset space ~
46265 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46267 reference "subsec:Margins"
46274 \begin_layout Section
46276 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46278 name "sec:Language-encodings"
46283 \begin_inset Index idx
46286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46287 Language ! Encoding
46295 \begin_layout Standard
46296 The document language and quote styles are set here.
46297 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
46298 (the \SpecialChar LyX
46300 is always encoded in utf8).
46301 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
46302 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
46303 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
46304 -command is not known for
46305 a particular character).
46306 \change_inserted -712698321 1557594829
46310 \begin_layout Standard
46312 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596095
46313 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
46314 outputs \SpecialChar LaTeX
46315 files in Unicode – or utf8, for that matter (which
46316 is nowadays also \SpecialChar LaTeX
46317 's default encoding).
46318 This should normally fit your needs, since \SpecialChar LaTeX
46319 's Unicode support covers the
46320 characters of most scripts.
46321 Nonetheless it is not yet comprehensive, so there might be cases where
46322 using one of the traditional, or
46323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46330 , encodings is necessary.
46333 \begin_layout Standard
46335 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596136
46337 provides support for these traditional encodings.
46340 Traditional (auto-selected)
46346 dropdown, \SpecialChar LyX
46347 automatically selects the appropriate traditional encoding for
46348 the given language(s).
46350 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
46354 \begin_layout Standard
46356 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
46357 If you use the option
46362 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
46365 If the document contains text in more than one language you
46366 \change_inserted -712698321 1557595342
46369 may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46372 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595350
46373 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
46374 exactly one encoding.
46375 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
46380 \begin_layout Standard
46382 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596155
46383 As a third option, \SpecialChar LyX
46389 If this is chosen, any character outside the 7bit ASCII range will be output
46390 as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
46394 \begin_layout Standard
46396 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645585
46397 Finally, you can also select
46401 , which lets you specify a specific (single) encoding for the whole document.
46402 Note that this encoding is then used for
46407 The custom list (which is spelled out below) consists of traditional encodings
46408 and some special cases of Unicode for specific purposes (see explanation
46412 \begin_layout Standard
46414 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
46417 Do not load inputenc
46419 checkbox does what it states: It prevents \SpecialChar LyX
46420 from automatically loading the
46427 \begin_inset Index idx
46430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46432 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
46434 packages ! inputenc
46442 This option might be useful if you use a class or package that pre-loads
46443 inputenc or if inputenc must not be used for some reason.
46444 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
46445 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
46446 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
46448 Note that this option is only available for the standard
46454 Traditional (auto-selected)
46461 \begin_layout Standard
46463 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596063
46465 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
46466 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
46467 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
46468 installation supports Unicode), choose
46469 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
46470 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
46471 is quite incomplete, so
46472 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
46477 (when \SpecialChar LyX
46478 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
46479 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
46480 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
46481 -commands is not used, because all
46482 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
46483 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
46484 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46485 , two new alternative engines
46486 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
46488 Both engines support Unicode natively.
46490 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
46493 \begin_inset space ~
46501 \begin_inset space ~
46509 \begin_inset space ~
46515 \begin_inset space ~
46519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46521 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
46526 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
46530 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
46535 \begin_layout Standard
46539 \begin_inset space ~
46544 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46545 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
46547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46555 The possible settings are:
46558 \begin_layout Description
46559 Default uses the language package that is selected in
46561 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46562 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46566 \begin_inset space ~
46570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46572 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
46579 \begin_layout Description
46580 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
46581 format you will use.
46582 In many cases this will be
46587 \begin_inset Index idx
46590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46598 If the newer package
46603 \begin_inset Index idx
46606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46608 packages ! polyglossia
46613 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
46614 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46615 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
46617 this package will be used instead of
46624 \begin_layout Description
46626 \begin_inset space ~
46637 would be more appropriate.
46640 \begin_layout Description
46641 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
46642 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
46646 (for German texts), type in
46649 \begin_inset Newline newline
46654 usepackage{ngerman}
46657 \begin_layout Description
46658 None will not use a language package.
46659 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
46662 \begin_layout Standard
46663 Here is a list with the important encodings:
46666 \begin_layout Description
46668 \change_deleted -712698321 1557645284
46670 \begin_inset space ~
46674 \begin_inset space ~
46678 \begin_inset space ~
46685 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46691 \begin_inset Index idx
46694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46696 packages ! inputenc
46702 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
46703 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
46704 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
46710 \begin_layout Description
46711 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
46713 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
46714 commands, which may result in a big
46715 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
46716 -commands are needed.
46718 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596221
46719 This is the same as the
46732 \begin_layout Description
46734 \begin_inset space ~
46738 \begin_inset space ~
46741 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
46744 \begin_layout Description
46746 \begin_inset space ~
46750 \begin_inset space ~
46753 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
46756 \begin_layout Description
46758 \begin_inset space ~
46761 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
46764 \begin_layout Description
46766 \begin_inset space ~
46770 \begin_inset space ~
46773 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
46774 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
46777 \begin_layout Description
46779 \begin_inset space ~
46783 \begin_inset space ~
46786 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
46790 \begin_layout Description
46792 \begin_inset space ~
46796 \begin_inset space ~
46799 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
46800 ISO-8859-13 encoding
46803 \begin_layout Description
46805 \begin_inset space ~
46809 \begin_inset space ~
46813 \begin_inset space ~
46816 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
46817 \begin_inset space ~
46823 \begin_layout Description
46825 \begin_inset space ~
46829 \begin_inset space ~
46833 \begin_inset space ~
46836 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
46837 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
46840 \begin_layout Description
46842 \begin_inset space ~
46846 \begin_inset space ~
46849 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
46850 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
46851 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46852 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
46853 \begin_inset space ~
46857 \begin_inset space ~
46863 \begin_layout Description
46865 \begin_inset space ~
46869 \begin_inset space ~
46872 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
46873 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
46874 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46876 should try to use the encoding Unicode
46877 \begin_inset space ~
46881 \begin_inset space ~
46887 \begin_layout Description
46889 \begin_inset space ~
46893 \begin_inset space ~
46896 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
46899 \begin_layout Description
46901 \begin_inset space ~
46905 \begin_inset space ~
46908 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
46911 \begin_layout Description
46913 \begin_inset space ~
46917 \begin_inset space ~
46920 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
46923 \begin_layout Description
46925 \begin_inset space ~
46928 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
46931 \begin_layout Description
46933 \begin_inset space ~
46936 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
46939 \begin_layout Description
46941 \begin_inset space ~
46945 \begin_inset space ~
46948 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
46951 \begin_layout Description
46953 \begin_inset space ~
46957 \begin_inset space ~
46963 \begin_layout Description
46965 \begin_inset space ~
46969 \begin_inset space ~
46972 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
46975 \begin_layout Description
46977 \begin_inset space ~
46981 \begin_inset space ~
46987 \begin_layout Description
46989 \begin_inset space ~
46993 \begin_inset space ~
46996 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47002 \begin_inset Index idx
47005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47012 , when using this, set the document language to
47017 \begin_layout Description
47019 \begin_inset space ~
47023 \begin_inset space ~
47026 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47031 , when using this, set the document language to
47034 \begin_inset space ~
47040 \begin_layout Description
47042 \begin_inset space ~
47046 \begin_inset space ~
47049 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47055 \begin_inset Index idx
47058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47060 packages ! japanese
47065 , when using this, set the document language to
47070 \begin_layout Description
47072 \begin_inset space ~
47076 \begin_inset space ~
47079 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47084 , when using this, set the document language to
47089 \begin_layout Description
47091 \begin_inset space ~
47095 \begin_inset space ~
47098 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47103 , when using this, set the document language to
47108 \begin_layout Description
47110 \begin_inset space ~
47113 (EUC-KR) for Korean
47116 \begin_layout Description
47118 \begin_inset space ~
47122 \begin_inset space ~
47126 \begin_inset space ~
47129 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
47132 \begin_layout Description
47134 \begin_inset space ~
47138 \begin_inset space ~
47142 \begin_inset space ~
47145 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
47146 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
47147 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
47150 \begin_layout Description
47152 \begin_inset space ~
47156 \begin_inset space ~
47162 \begin_layout Description
47164 \begin_inset space ~
47168 \begin_inset space ~
47171 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
47172 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
47175 \begin_layout Description
47177 \begin_inset space ~
47181 \begin_inset space ~
47184 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47190 \begin_inset Index idx
47193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47200 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
47201 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596410
47203 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
47204 with the default encoding (
47206 Unicode (utf8) [default]
47212 dropdown list) with CJK languages.
47213 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
47218 \begin_layout Description
47220 \begin_inset space ~
47228 \begin_inset space ~
47231 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
47238 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47241 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47248 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47249 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47251 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
47254 \begin_layout Description
47256 \begin_inset space ~
47260 \begin_inset space ~
47263 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47269 \begin_inset Index idx
47272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47280 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596443
47283 including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
47285 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596475
47286 This used to be more comprehensive than
47289 \begin_inset space ~
47294 , but meanwhile it is rather outdated.
47299 \begin_layout Description
47301 \begin_inset space ~
47304 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47310 \begin_inset Index idx
47313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47315 packages ! inputenc
47322 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596266
47323 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
47325 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596400
47326 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
47327 with the default encoding (
47329 Unicode (utf8) [default]
47335 dropdown list) with non-CJK languages.
47336 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
47341 \begin_layout Description
47343 \begin_inset space ~
47347 \begin_inset space ~
47351 \begin_inset space ~
47354 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
47355 \begin_inset space ~
47361 \begin_layout Description
47363 \begin_inset space ~
47367 \begin_inset space ~
47371 \begin_inset space ~
47374 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
47375 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
47376 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
47380 \begin_layout Description
47382 \begin_inset space ~
47386 \begin_inset space ~
47390 \begin_inset space ~
47393 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
47394 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
47397 \begin_layout Section
47399 \begin_inset Index idx
47402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47409 \begin_inset Index idx
47412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47419 \begin_inset Index idx
47422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47423 Color ! Shaded boxes
47429 \begin_inset Index idx
47432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47433 Color ! Greyed-out notes
47441 \begin_layout Standard
47442 Here you can alter the font color for the
47446 (default: black), for
47449 \begin_inset space ~
47454 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
47458 (default: white) and for
47461 \begin_inset space ~
47471 sets the color back to the default.
47474 \begin_layout Standard
47475 Clicking any button showing
47483 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
47484 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
47485 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
47486 later more quickly.
47489 \begin_layout Standard
47490 Note, if you change the
47493 \begin_inset space ~
47498 font color and use the option
47501 \begin_inset space ~
47506 in the document settings under
47509 \begin_inset space ~
47514 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
47515 \begin_inset space ~
47519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47521 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
47528 \begin_layout Standard
47529 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
47535 \begin_layout Standard
47539 \begin_inset space ~
47548 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
47551 \begin_inset space ~
47554 Code after a forced page break:
47557 \begin_layout Itemize
47558 For the page color:
47559 \begin_inset Newline newline
47566 pagecolor{color name}
47569 \begin_layout Itemize
47570 For the text color:
47571 \begin_inset Newline newline
47581 \begin_layout Standard
47582 You are restricted to one of
47618 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
47625 \begin_inset space ~
47631 \begin_inset Newline newline
47634 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
47635 names to refer to them:
47638 \begin_layout Itemize
47644 \begin_inset Newline newline
47649 page_backgroundcolor
47652 \begin_layout Itemize
47656 \begin_inset space ~
47662 \begin_inset Newline newline
47670 \begin_layout Itemize
47674 \begin_inset space ~
47680 \begin_inset Newline newline
47688 \begin_layout Itemize
47692 \begin_inset space ~
47698 \begin_inset Newline newline
47706 \begin_layout Standard
47707 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
47710 \begin_inset space ~
47718 \begin_inset space ~
47726 \begin_layout Section
47728 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206827
47732 \begin_layout Standard
47734 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206929
47735 Here you can do some settings related to change tracking (see sec.
47736 \begin_inset space ~
47740 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47742 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
47750 Alternatively to the menu or toolbar, you can set here whether changes
47751 are being tracked and whether they are shown in the output.
47754 \begin_layout Standard
47756 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
47757 Additionally, you can advise LyX to place a change bar in the margin of
47759 This might be useful to make changed passages more salient.
47762 \begin_layout Section
47766 \begin_layout Standard
47767 Here you can adjust the
47771 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
47775 as described in section
47776 \begin_inset space ~
47780 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47782 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
47787 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620045
47791 \begin_layout Standard
47793 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620379
47794 You can typeset lines numbering in the output file by enabling the checkbox
47796 The functionality is handled by package lineno and and additional options
47797 of this package can be used as well.
47798 The most common one are:
47801 \begin_layout Description
47803 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620630
47804 right Line numbers to the right margin
47807 \begin_layout Description
47809 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620589
47810 switch Line number to the outer margin (left – even pages, right – odd pages)
47814 \begin_layout Description
47816 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620637
47817 switch* Line numbers to the inner margin
47820 \begin_layout Description
47822 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620780
47823 modulo Print numbers only on multiples of five lines
47826 \begin_layout Description
47828 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620792
47830 \begin_inset space ~
47833 mathlines Line numbers for math environments (both options needed).
47838 \begin_layout Section
47842 \begin_layout Standard
47843 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47849 \begin_inset Index idx
47852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47854 packages ! biblatex
47864 \begin_inset Index idx
47867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47879 \begin_inset Index idx
47882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47890 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47893 Sectioned bibliography
47895 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47901 \begin_inset Index idx
47904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47906 packages ! bibtopic
47916 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
47917 Finally, you can select a document-specific
47921 for the generation of the bibliography.
47922 For a further description of these possibilities see section
47923 \begin_inset space ~
47927 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47929 reference "sec:Bibliography"
47936 \begin_layout Section
47940 \begin_layout Standard
47941 Here you can define the
47945 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
47947 \begin_inset space ~
47951 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47953 reference "sec:Index"
47960 \begin_layout Section
47964 \begin_layout Standard
47965 The PDF properties are explained in section
47966 \begin_inset space ~
47970 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47972 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
47979 \begin_layout Section
47983 \begin_layout Standard
47984 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
47985 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47991 \begin_inset Index idx
47994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48006 \begin_inset Index idx
48009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48021 \begin_inset Index idx
48024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48036 \begin_inset Index idx
48039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48051 \begin_inset Index idx
48054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48056 packages ! mathdots
48066 \begin_inset Index idx
48069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48071 packages ! mathtools
48081 \begin_inset Index idx
48084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48096 \begin_inset Index idx
48099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48101 packages ! stackrel
48111 \begin_inset Index idx
48114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48116 packages ! stmaryrd
48126 \begin_inset Index idx
48129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48131 packages ! undertilde
48136 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
48139 \begin_layout Description
48140 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
48141 -errors in formulas,
48142 ensure that you have this enabled.
48145 \begin_layout Description
48146 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
48147 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
48148 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
48152 \begin_layout Description
48153 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
48156 \begin_inset space ~
48168 \begin_layout Description
48169 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
48172 \begin_inset space ~
48184 \begin_layout Description
48185 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
48196 \begin_layout Description
48197 mathtools is used for the math commands
48233 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
48240 \begin_layout Description
48241 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
48243 Chemical Symbols and Equations
48252 \begin_layout Description
48253 stackrel is used for the math command
48270 \begin_layout Description
48271 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
48274 \begin_layout Description
48275 undertilde is used for the math command
48283 Accents for one Character
48292 \begin_layout Section
48294 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
48296 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
48302 \begin_layout Standard
48304 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
48305 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
48308 \begin_layout Standard
48310 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
48311 The float placement options
48312 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
48315 are described in the section
48318 \begin_inset space ~
48322 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
48324 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
48332 \begin_inset space ~
48340 \begin_layout Section
48344 \begin_layout Standard
48345 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
48347 Program Code Listings
48352 \begin_inset space ~
48360 \begin_layout Section
48364 \begin_layout Standard
48365 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
48373 set to be used and set the
48378 The itemize environment is described in section
48379 \begin_inset space ~
48383 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48385 reference "sec:Itemize"
48392 \begin_layout Standard
48393 You can furthermore specify a
48396 \begin_inset space ~
48401 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48402 command of the desired character.
48403 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
48410 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
48412 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48416 \begin_inset space \space{}
48420 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
48430 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
48431 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
48434 \begin_layout Standard
48435 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48443 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
48444 -packages in the preamble (menu
48447 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48448 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48451 \begin_inset space ~
48457 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
48461 usepackage{textcomp}
48464 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
48468 usepackage{amssymb}
48478 \begin_layout Section
48482 \begin_layout Standard
48483 Branches are described in section
48484 \begin_inset space ~
48488 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48490 reference "sec:Branches"
48497 \begin_layout Section
48499 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48501 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
48508 \begin_layout Standard
48509 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
48512 \begin_layout Description
48514 \begin_inset space ~
48518 \begin_inset space ~
48521 Format: The format that is used when you enter
48522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48538 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48541 View Master Document
48542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48549 Update Master Document
48550 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48557 menu or the toolbar.
48558 The default is set in
48560 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
48561 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
48563 \begin_inset space ~
48566 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
48570 \begin_inset space ~
48574 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48576 reference "sec:File-Formats"
48583 \begin_layout Description
48585 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647276
48587 \begin_inset space ~
48591 \begin_inset space ~
48595 \begin_inset space ~
48598 programs If this is switched on, \SpecialChar LaTeX
48603 option which is needed with some packages.
48604 Note that this comes with security risks, so please use this only when
48605 really necessary and if you know what you are doing.
48608 \begin_layout Description
48610 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647006
48612 \begin_inset space ~
48616 \begin_inset space ~
48619 Options offers settings for the
48627 \begin_layout Itemize
48631 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646679
48633 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646679
48635 \begin_inset space ~
48641 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646686
48643 \begin_inset space ~
48647 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646686
48653 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646719
48655 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646729
48656 settings for the menu
48658 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
48662 \begin_inset space ~
48666 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646752
48669 and allows to customize the macro used in this process
48670 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646757
48675 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
48677 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646759
48679 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
48682 or a detailed description see section
48684 Reverse DVI/PDF search
48689 \begin_inset space ~
48695 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646762
48699 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647009
48703 \begin_layout Itemize
48705 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647929
48708 Put fragile content out of moving arguments
48710 determines whether so-called
48711 \begin_inset Quotes els
48715 \begin_inset Quotes ers
48719 constructs (such as labels or index entries) are placed outside of so-called
48721 \begin_inset Quotes els
48725 \begin_inset Quotes ers
48728 in \SpecialChar LaTeX
48729 (such as sections or captions), even if the corresponding insets are
48730 placed in such context in \SpecialChar LyX
48732 This setting is on by default, since it prevents nasty \SpecialChar LaTeX
48734 If you rely on labels or index entries being kept inside the problematic
48735 macros, you can uncheck this.
48736 If you don't know what we are talking about here, worry not: just leave
48743 \begin_layout Description
48745 \begin_inset space ~
48749 \begin_inset space ~
48752 Options offers settings for the export format
48760 \begin_inset space ~
48765 will assure that the output follows exactly version
48766 \begin_inset space ~
48769 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
48773 \begin_inset space ~
48778 settings are described in detail in section
48780 Math Output in XHTML
48785 \begin_inset space ~
48794 \begin_inset space ~
48798 \begin_inset space ~
48803 is used for the size of equations in the output.
48806 \begin_layout Description
48808 \begin_inset space ~
48813 Save transient properties
48815 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
48816 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
48817 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
48821 \begin_layout Itemize
48822 the activation of change tracking
48825 \begin_layout Itemize
48826 the output of tracked changes
48829 \begin_layout Itemize
48830 the recording of the document directory path.
48833 \begin_layout Standard
48834 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
48835 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
48839 \begin_layout Section
48847 \begin_layout Standard
48848 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
48850 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
48852 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
48854 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
48858 \begin_layout Standard
48859 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48860 -syntax is given in section
48861 \begin_inset space ~
48865 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48867 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
48874 \begin_layout Chapter
48880 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48882 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
48887 \begin_inset Index idx
48890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48899 \begin_layout Standard
48900 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
48902 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
48906 It has the following submenus.
48909 \begin_layout Section
48913 \begin_layout Subsection
48917 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48918 User Interface File
48919 \begin_inset Index idx
48922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48923 Customization ! of toolbars
48929 \begin_inset Index idx
48932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48933 Customization ! of menus
48941 \begin_layout Standard
48942 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
48943 interface (ui) file.
48944 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
48952 \begin_layout Description
48957 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
48960 \begin_layout Description
48967 the menu entries in popup context menus
48970 \begin_layout Description
48975 specifies the toolbar buttons
48978 \begin_layout Standard
48979 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
48980 and edit the entries.
48983 \begin_layout Standard
48984 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
48996 entries must be finished with an explicit
49021 and in the case of the
49022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49026 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49034 The syntax for the entries is:
49037 \begin_layout Standard
49038 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49044 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49052 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49056 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49061 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49067 \begin_layout Standard
49069 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49072 All the \SpecialChar LyX
49073 -functions are listed in the menu
49075 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
49077 \begin_inset space ~
49085 \begin_layout Standard
49086 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
49092 \begin_layout Standard
49093 For example, assuming you use the menu
49095 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
49098 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
49102 \begin_layout Standard
49103 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49109 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49117 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49127 \begin_layout Standard
49129 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49133 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49144 to have the sixth bookmark.
49147 \begin_layout Standard
49151 \begin_inset space ~
49156 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
49157 's toolbar buttons.
49158 The currently available icon sets are compared in
49159 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49162 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
49170 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49174 \begin_layout Standard
49177 Enable tool tips in main work area
49179 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
49183 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49187 \begin_layout Standard
49192 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
49193 should display in the menu
49195 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49197 \begin_inset space ~
49205 \begin_layout Subsection
49209 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49213 \begin_layout Standard
49216 Restore window layouts and geometries
49219 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
49220 the last \SpecialChar LyX
49224 \begin_layout Standard
49227 Restore cursor positions
49229 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
49233 \begin_layout Standard
49236 Load opened files from last session
49238 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
49242 \begin_layout Standard
49245 Clear all session information
49247 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
49248 sessions (cursor positions, names
49249 of last opened documents, etc.).
49252 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49254 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49256 name "subsec:Backup documents"
49261 \begin_inset Index idx
49264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49273 \begin_layout Standard
49276 Backup original documents when saving
49278 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
49279 it was saved the last time.
49280 It is stored in the
49283 \begin_inset space ~
49289 \begin_inset space ~
49293 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49295 reference "sec:Paths"
49299 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
49302 \begin_inset space ~
49308 The backup file has the file extension
49309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49323 \begin_layout Standard
49326 Backup documents, every
49328 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
49331 \begin_layout Standard
49334 Save documents compressed by default
49336 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
49337 \begin_inset space ~
49341 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49343 reference "subsec:Compressed"
49348 This applies to newly created documents only.
49349 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
49352 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49353 Windows & work area
49356 \begin_layout Standard
49359 Open documents in tabs
49361 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
49365 \begin_layout Standard
49370 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
49375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49377 \begin_inset space ~
49381 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49383 reference "sec:Paths"
49387 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
49394 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
49395 documents will be opened in the same running instance
49396 of \SpecialChar LyX
49398 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
49399 instance is created for each file.
49402 \begin_layout Standard
49405 Single close-tab button
49407 is checked, there will only be one close button (
49417 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
49418 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
49419 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
49423 \begin_layout Standard
49424 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49432 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
49433 before the change takes effect.
49441 \begin_layout Standard
49446 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
49448 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
49450 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
49454 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
49455 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
49456 and only want to close the view in once instance.
49459 \begin_layout Subsection
49461 \begin_inset Index idx
49464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49471 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49473 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
49480 \begin_layout Standard
49481 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
49485 \begin_layout Standard
49486 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49494 This section only deals with the fonts
49498 the \SpecialChar LyX
49500 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
49503 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49504 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
49515 \begin_layout Standard
49516 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
49533 (depends on the system) as its
49536 \begin_inset space ~
49552 \begin_layout Standard
49553 You can change the font size with the
49560 \begin_layout Standard
49565 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
49567 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49570 points have the size of 1
49571 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49575 \begin_inset space ~
49579 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49581 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
49586 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
49587 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49591 The sizes are explained in detail in section
49592 \begin_inset space ~
49596 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49598 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
49605 \begin_layout Subsection
49607 \begin_inset Index idx
49610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49611 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
49618 \begin_inset Index idx
49621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49630 \begin_layout Standard
49631 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
49632 by choosing an item in the
49633 list and selecting the
49640 \begin_layout Standard
49641 By checking the option
49645 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
49648 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
49649 \begin_inset space ~
49653 \begin_inset space ~
49658 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
49661 \begin_layout Subsection
49663 \begin_inset Index idx
49666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49675 \begin_layout Standard
49676 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
49680 \begin_layout Standard
49685 enables previewing snippets of your document.
49686 This feature is described in section
49687 \begin_inset space ~
49691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49693 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
49700 \begin_layout Standard
49701 Checking the option
49704 \begin_inset space ~
49708 \begin_inset space ~
49712 \begin_inset space ~
49717 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
49720 \begin_layout Section
49722 \begin_inset Index idx
49725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49734 \begin_layout Subsection
49738 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49742 \begin_layout Standard
49745 Cursor follows scrollbar
49747 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
49751 \begin_layout Standard
49752 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
49753 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
49754 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
49757 \begin_layout Standard
49760 Scroll below end of document
49762 is self-explanatory.
49765 \begin_layout Standard
49766 In \SpecialChar LyX
49767 one can jump from word to word by pressing
49774 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
49776 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
49777 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
49778 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924606
49782 \begin_layout Standard
49784 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924785
49787 Keep change tracking markup on copy and paste
49789 is for users who don't want tracked changes to be dissolved on copy and
49790 paste operations (i.
49791 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49794 e., inserted as new text with the deletions removed).
49795 If this is checked, the change-tracked text will be copied and pasted as
49796 is, independent if changes are currently tracked or not.
49797 This also applies to wrapping to\SpecialChar breakableslash
49798 dissolving from insets.
49803 \begin_layout Standard
49806 Sort environments alphabetically
49808 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
49811 \begin_layout Standard
49814 Group environments by their category
49816 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
49819 \begin_layout Standard
49824 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
49833 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509726
49837 \begin_layout Standard
49839 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509987
49842 Search drive for cited files
49844 allows \SpecialChar LyX
49845 to query your disk for cited documents when using the
49848 \begin_inset space ~
49852 \begin_inset space ~
49856 \begin_inset space ~
49860 \begin_inset space ~
49863 Content\SpecialChar ldots
49866 context menu on a citation.
49871 field determines the search pattern.
49873 \begin_inset space ~
49877 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49879 reference "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
49888 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49892 \begin_layout Standard
49893 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
49898 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
49899 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
49903 \begin_layout Subsection
49905 \begin_inset Index idx
49908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49915 \begin_inset Index idx
49918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49919 Settings ! Shortcuts
49927 \begin_layout Standard
49932 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
49934 Several binding files are available, among them:
49937 \begin_layout Description
49938 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
49941 \begin_layout Description
49942 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
49954 \begin_layout Description
49955 mac.bind a set of bindings for
49958 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49966 \begin_layout Standard
49967 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
49972 , and binding files for special languages.
49973 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
49974 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49978 \begin_inset space \space{}
49982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49990 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
49991 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
49992 will try to use the appropriate binding
49996 \begin_layout Standard
49997 Some binding files, like
50001 , only have a limited scope.
50002 When looking at the end of the file
50006 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
50009 \begin_layout Standard
50013 \begin_inset space ~
50017 \begin_inset space ~
50022 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
50023 in the selected key binding file.
50026 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50028 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50030 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
50035 \begin_inset Index idx
50038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50039 Key Bindings ! Editing
50047 \begin_layout Standard
50048 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
50049 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
50050 functions and the bound shortcuts.
50051 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
50054 Show key-bindings containing
50057 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
50058 Insert there for example as keyword
50059 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50063 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50066 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
50067 functions that contain
50068 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50072 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50076 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
50077 All \SpecialChar LyX
50078 functions are also listed in the file
50083 that you will find in the
50090 \begin_layout Standard
50091 For example, to add the shortcut
50099 , select the function and press the
50104 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
50105 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
50108 \begin_layout Standard
50109 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
50110 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
50112 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
50113 function names as a semicolon separated list.
50115 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
50120 \begin_layout Standard
50121 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
50124 \begin_layout Standard
50125 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
50127 The syntax of the entries is:
50130 \begin_layout Standard
50136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50140 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50144 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50149 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50155 \begin_layout Standard
50156 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
50157 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
50158 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50185 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
50186 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
50187 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
50188 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
50190 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
50194 , you needed to specify it as
50199 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
50202 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
50205 \begin_layout Subsection
50207 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50209 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
50214 \begin_inset Index idx
50217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50224 \begin_inset Index idx
50227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50228 Settings ! Keyboard Map
50236 \begin_layout Standard
50237 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
50238 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
50239 provides keyboard maps.
50240 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
50241 is a Romanian one, you can enable
50244 \begin_inset space ~
50248 \begin_inset space ~
50253 and select the keyboard map file named
50260 \begin_layout Standard
50269 keyboard map and, if you use the
50273 bindings, you can select the first and second with
50276 arg "keymap-primary"
50282 arg "keymap-secondary"
50285 respectively or toggle between them with
50288 arg "keymap-toggle"
50294 \begin_layout Standard
50295 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
50298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50303 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
50312 \begin_layout Standard
50313 You can also specify the mouse
50315 Wheel scrolling speed
50318 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
50322 Middle mouse button pasting
50324 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
50325 inserts the content of the clipboard.
50328 \begin_layout Standard
50336 \begin_inset space ~
50340 \begin_inset space ~
50345 you can select a key for zooming.
50346 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
50349 \begin_layout Subsection
50353 \begin_layout Standard
50354 Input completion is described in section
50355 \begin_inset space ~
50359 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50361 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
50368 \begin_layout Section
50370 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50377 \begin_inset Index idx
50380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50387 \begin_inset Index idx
50390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50399 \begin_layout Standard
50400 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
50401 are normally determined during
50403 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
50406 \begin_layout Description
50408 \begin_inset space ~
50411 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
50412 's working directory.
50413 It is the default when you
50424 \begin_inset space ~
50432 \begin_layout Description
50434 \begin_inset space ~
50437 templates This directory
50438 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354019
50439 contains the templates that are shown
50440 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354025
50441 will be opened when you use the menu
50442 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354026
50447 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
50449 \begin_inset space ~
50453 \begin_inset space ~
50461 \begin_layout Description
50463 \begin_inset space ~
50466 files This directory
50467 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354035
50468 will be opened when you use the
50469 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354048
50470 contains the example files that are listed in
50473 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352959
50482 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
50484 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352950
50486 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352963
50492 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354004
50494 \begin_inset Newline newline
50498 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
50501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50510 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
50511 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
50521 \begin_layout Description
50523 \begin_inset space ~
50527 \begin_inset Index idx
50530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50536 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
50537 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
50538 \begin_inset space ~
50542 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50544 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
50552 will be used to save the backups.
50553 \begin_inset Newline newline
50556 Backup files have the ending
50557 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50561 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50567 \begin_layout Description
50569 \begin_inset space ~
50572 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
50573 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
50575 \begin_inset Newline newline
50582 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50588 You can edit this file with the program
50597 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
50598 in its preferences under
50601 \begin_inset space ~
50607 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
50612 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
50614 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
50615 in your \SpecialChar LyX
50621 and \SpecialChar LyX
50622 need to be running the same time.
50623 \begin_inset Newline newline
50626 The pipe is also used for the
50630 feature, see section
50631 \begin_inset space ~
50635 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50637 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
50642 \begin_inset Newline newline
50645 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
50646 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
50647 \begin_inset Newline newline
50663 \begin_layout Description
50665 \begin_inset space ~
50668 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
50671 \begin_layout Description
50673 \begin_inset space ~
50676 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
50677 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
50678 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
50681 \begin_layout Description
50683 \begin_inset space ~
50686 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
50692 You only need to specify it if you are using
50696 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
50698 For \SpecialChar LyX
50703 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
50707 \begin_layout Description
50709 \begin_inset space ~
50712 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
50713 When \SpecialChar LyX
50714 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
50715 to find it on the system.
50716 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
50718 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
50720 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50724 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50727 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
50728 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
50731 \begin_layout Description
50733 \begin_inset space ~
50736 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
50737 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
50738 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
50739 code or in the document
50741 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
50743 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
50744 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
50745 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
50746 scanned for the input files.
50747 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
50748 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
50750 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
50751 compilation may fail for some documents.
50754 \begin_layout Section
50758 \begin_layout Standard
50759 Here you can insert your
50768 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
50770 \begin_inset space ~
50774 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50776 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
50780 , to mark changes you make as yours.
50783 \begin_layout Section
50785 \begin_inset Index idx
50788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50789 Language ! Settings
50795 \begin_inset Index idx
50798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50799 Settings ! Language
50807 \begin_layout Subsection
50809 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50811 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
50818 \begin_layout Description
50820 \begin_inset space ~
50824 \begin_inset space ~
50827 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
50829 You can find its actual translation status here:
50830 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50832 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
50838 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708959
50842 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50844 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708986
50845 LaTeX Language Support
50850 \begin_layout Description
50852 \begin_inset space ~
50855 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
50856 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
50857 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
50858 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
50859 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50863 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50867 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50871 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50875 The most widespread language package is
50880 \begin_inset Index idx
50883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50890 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
50892 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
50893 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
50894 come with the alternative
50900 \begin_inset Index idx
50903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50905 packages ! polyglossia
50910 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
50911 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
50917 The available selections are described in section
50918 \begin_inset space ~
50922 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50924 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
50931 \begin_layout Description
50933 \begin_inset space ~
50937 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708374
50938 If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
50939 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
50941 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708374
50945 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708377
50949 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708382
50951 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708384
50955 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708639
50956 that is used to switch to a different language
50957 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708410
50958 to start the package
50962 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708611
50963 This might be useful if you want to use a different command with
50967 (which provides several alternative commands with different behavior),
50968 or if you use a custom language package with specific commands, such as
50971 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
50975 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
50983 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708616
50991 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708621
50994 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
50996 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
51000 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
51018 selectlanguage{$$lang}
51019 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
51026 is a placeholder that is substituted with the respective language name
51027 in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51032 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
51037 , this setting is ignored.
51042 \begin_layout Description
51044 \begin_inset space ~
51048 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857836
51055 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857869
51056 Use this if the language switch set in
51060 needs to be explicitly ended, as in
51064 's alternative command
51068 begin{otherlanguage*}\SpecialChar ldots
51069 \SpecialChar allowbreak
51072 end{otherlanguage*}
51076 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708866
51077 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
51078 command toggles the package on and off
51079 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858041
51080 Empty by default, as
51084 selectlanguage{$$lang}
51086 does not need to be explicitly ended (the switch remains valid until the
51091 selectlanguage{$$lang}
51097 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857868
51102 , this setting is ignored.
51107 \begin_layout Description
51109 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
51111 \begin_inset space ~
51115 \begin_inset space ~
51118 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
51122 \begin_layout Description
51124 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
51126 \begin_inset space ~
51130 \begin_inset space ~
51133 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
51139 \begin_layout Description
51141 \begin_inset space ~
51145 \begin_inset space ~
51149 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709051
51151 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709052
51154 this option is set, the languages used in the document will be added
51155 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709127
51158 to the document class options
51159 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709259
51160 rather than the language package options.
51161 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709186
51165 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709191
51166 so that they can be used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
51168 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709305
51169 Since the document class passes all options in gets to all loaded \SpecialChar LaTeX
51171 all language-aware packages will be informed about the used languages this
51176 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709264
51177 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
51186 \begin_layout Description
51188 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709314
51190 \begin_inset space ~
51194 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709328
51196 \begin_inset space ~
51200 \begin_inset space ~
51204 \begin_inset space ~
51210 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709331
51212 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709331
51215 this option is set,
51216 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709808
51217 the language switch defined in
51220 \begin_inset space ~
51225 is output at the beginning of the document, thereby explicitly switching
51226 to the document language.
51227 This assures that the correct language is used in any case.
51228 This might be needed if you use a non-default
51231 \begin_inset space ~
51236 or if a package resets the document language.
51237 If not set, the language that is active at document start is used (this
51238 usually should be the document language).
51239 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709548
51240 documents start with the chosen document language.
51241 When this option is not set, the
51244 \begin_inset space ~
51249 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51251 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
51254 \begin_inset space ~
51264 \begin_layout Description
51266 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709354
51268 \begin_inset space ~
51272 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709358
51274 \begin_inset space ~
51278 \begin_inset space ~
51282 \begin_inset space ~
51288 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709361
51292 \begin_inset space ~
51296 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709392
51297 Set document language explicitly
51303 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709618
51305 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709618
51311 \begin_inset space ~
51317 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709625
51319 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709626
51323 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709628
51325 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709628
51328 the end of the document.
51329 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709816
51333 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51334 \paragraph_spacing single
51336 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709833
51342 \begin_layout Description
51344 \begin_inset space ~
51348 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709847
51350 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709845
51354 \begin_inset space ~
51358 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709877
51360 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709877
51362 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709878
51366 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709882
51369 in a language different
51370 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709886
51372 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709886
51375 the document language will be
51376 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709907
51377 marked (by default with a blue
51380 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709911
51382 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709911
51386 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709927
51390 \begin_layout Description
51392 \change_inserted -712698321 1563711969
51394 \begin_inset space ~
51398 \begin_inset space ~
51402 \begin_inset space ~
51405 language If set, \SpecialChar LyX
51406 will switch the input language if the keyboard map is
51407 switched via the operating system.
51408 This is particularly useful if you switch between languages with different
51410 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51413 g., English and Hebrew: in this case, switching the keyboard to Hebrew will
51414 automatically switch the input language to Hebrew as well, and vice versa).
51419 \begin_layout Description
51421 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709926
51423 \begin_inset space ~
51427 \begin_inset space ~
51430 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
51431 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
51436 \begin_layout Description
51438 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
51440 \begin_inset space ~
51444 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710132
51446 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
51450 \begin_inset space ~
51454 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710265
51455 Here you can define how cursor movement (with the arrow keys) behaves
51456 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710266
51458 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710267
51462 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710171
51464 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710286
51465 scripts with right-to-left direction (e.g., Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi).
51467 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
51468 , you can define if the left and right arrow keys move the cursor visually
51469 to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
51471 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859701
51476 \begin_layout Standard
51481 means that the cursor
51482 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859940
51483 follows the logic of the text direction, and the arrows' direction relates
51484 to the directionality of the main paragraph language.
51486 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51489 g., in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph (say, Hebrew
51490 embedded in English), the cursor starts at the right (that is, at the
51494 of the embedded passage in the right-to-left logic) when coming from the
51496 The meaning of the key is thus swapped for that part; right arrow in this
51497 specific case always means: move
51501 in text (even if this means:
51507 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
51508 is moved to the left when pressing the right arrow key
51509 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859705
51510 This setting might be useful in texts that mix left-to-right and right-to-left
51511 scripts, since the cursor then follows a coherent
51512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51523 \begin_layout Standard
51525 \change_inserted -712698321 1563860084
51530 means: always move to the direction towards which the arrows really point.
51531 In this case, in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph,
51532 the cursor starts at the left (in the text logic:
51536 ) when coming from the left.
51537 The visual meaning of the key is thus maintained in all cases, at the expense
51539 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
51540 and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
51541 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858627
51546 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51548 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710235
51552 \begin_layout Description
51554 \change_inserted -712698321 1563776004
51556 \begin_inset space ~
51560 \begin_inset space ~
51563 separator Defines the default decimal separator for use in tables (decimal
51564 separator alignment).
51565 By default, the appropriate character for the current language is selected
51567 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51570 g., dot for English, comma for German), but you can also specify a specific
51571 (static) custom character here.
51574 \begin_layout Description
51576 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709001
51578 \begin_inset space ~
51582 \begin_inset space ~
51585 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
51591 \begin_layout Subsection
51595 \begin_layout Standard
51596 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
51597 \begin_inset space ~
51601 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51603 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
51610 \begin_layout Section
51614 \begin_layout Subsection
51616 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51618 name "subsec:General-output"
51625 \begin_layout Description
51627 \begin_inset space ~
51630 search Commands that will be used for the menu
51632 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
51634 \begin_inset space ~
51640 For a detailed description see section
51642 Reverse DVI/PDF search
51647 \begin_inset space ~
51655 \begin_layout Description
51657 \begin_inset space ~
51660 Options Options for the program
51664 that is used for the export format
51669 \begin_inset space ~
51673 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51675 reference "subsec:Export"
51680 Possible options are listed in the
51685 \begin_inset Newline newline
51689 \begin_inset Flex URL
51692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51694 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
51704 \begin_layout Description
51706 \begin_inset space ~
51710 \begin_inset space ~
51713 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
51716 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
51717 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
51719 \begin_inset space ~
51725 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
51728 \begin_layout Description
51730 \change_deleted -712698321 1534601711
51732 \begin_inset space ~
51736 \begin_inset Index idx
51739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51746 \begin_inset Index idx
51749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51750 Settings ! Date format
51755 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
51756 \begin_inset Newline newline
51760 \begin_inset Flex URL
51763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51765 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
51771 \begin_inset Newline newline
51774 For example the format
51775 \begin_inset Newline newline
51779 \begin_inset Newline newline
51782 prints the date as day/month/year.
51787 \begin_layout Description
51789 \begin_inset space ~
51793 \begin_inset space ~
51796 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
51797 is allowed to overwrite on export.
51800 \begin_layout Subsection
51806 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51808 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
51813 \begin_inset Index idx
51816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51817 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
51826 \begin_layout Description
51828 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
51830 \begin_inset space ~
51838 \begin_inset space ~
51842 \begin_inset space ~
51845 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
51850 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
51871 are used for Cyrillic.
51872 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
51873 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51885 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
51887 sets up in the background.
51888 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
51893 \begin_layout Description
51895 \begin_inset space ~
51899 \begin_inset space ~
51903 \begin_inset space ~
51907 \begin_inset space ~
51910 options They only have an effect when the program
51914 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
51917 \begin_layout Standard
51918 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
51919 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
51920 manuals of the applications.
51923 \begin_layout Description
51925 \begin_inset space ~
51928 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
51929 \begin_inset space ~
51933 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51935 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
51942 \begin_layout Description
51944 \begin_inset space ~
51947 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
51948 \begin_inset space ~
51952 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51954 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
51961 \begin_layout Description
51963 \begin_inset space ~
51966 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
51967 \begin_inset space ~
51971 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51973 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
51980 \begin_layout Description
51986 \begin_inset space ~
51989 command Command for the program
51991 Check\SpecialChar TeX
51994 that is described in the section
51996 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
52001 Additional Features
52006 \begin_layout Standard
52007 There are additionally the following options:
52010 \begin_layout Description
52012 \begin_inset space ~
52016 \begin_inset space ~
52020 \begin_inset space ~
52024 \begin_inset space ~
52029 \begin_inset space ~
52032 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
52033 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52039 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52050 to separate folders.
52051 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
52053 \begin_inset Index idx
52056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52063 \begin_inset Index idx
52066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52075 \begin_layout Description
52077 \begin_inset space ~
52081 \begin_inset space ~
52085 \begin_inset space ~
52089 \begin_inset space ~
52093 \begin_inset space ~
52097 \begin_inset space ~
52100 changes Removes all manually set
52106 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
52107 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
52109 \begin_inset space ~
52114 dialog when changing the document class.
52117 \begin_layout Section
52119 \begin_inset space ~
52123 \begin_inset Index idx
52126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52135 \begin_layout Subsection
52137 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52139 name "subsec:Converters"
52144 \begin_inset Index idx
52147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52156 \begin_layout Standard
52157 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
52158 from one format to another.
52159 You can modify converters or create new ones.
52160 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
52167 \begin_inset space ~
52172 field and press the
52177 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
52181 \begin_inset space ~
52186 drop-down list, modify the
52190 field and press the
52197 \begin_layout Standard
52200 Converter File Cache
52206 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
52208 Maximum Age (in days
52211 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
52212 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
52215 \begin_layout Standard
52216 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
52217 definition, is described in the section
52228 \begin_layout Subsection
52230 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52232 name "sec:File-Formats"
52237 \begin_inset Index idx
52240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52247 \begin_inset Index idx
52250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52259 \begin_layout Standard
52260 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
52270 programs that should be used for certain formats.
52273 \begin_layout Standard
52274 You can also define the
52276 Default output format
52278 that is used when you use
52280 View, Update, View Master Document
52284 Update Master Document
52290 menu or the toolbar.
52293 \begin_layout Standard
52294 More about formats and their options is described in the section
52305 \begin_layout Standard
52306 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
52308 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
52309 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
52310 This is done by specifying a
52315 More about this is described in the section
52326 \begin_layout Chapter
52327 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
52329 \begin_inset Index idx
52332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52339 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52341 name "chap:Units-available-in"
52348 \begin_layout Standard
52350 \begin_inset space ~
52354 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52356 reference "tab:Units"
52360 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
52361 and used in this documentation.
52364 \begin_layout Standard
52365 \begin_inset Float table
52372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52373 \begin_inset Caption Standard
52375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52376 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52391 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
52397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52399 \begin_inset Tabular
52400 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
52401 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
52402 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
52403 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
52404 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
52406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52450 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52454 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52487 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52491 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52553 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52557 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
52561 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52718 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52722 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52755 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52759 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52792 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52796 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52828 scaled point (65536
52829 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52833 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52896 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
52901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53020 % of original image width
53025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53109 \begin_layout Standard
53110 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
53113 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
53120 \begin_layout Bibliography
53121 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53122 LatexCommand bibitem
53129 The \SpecialChar LyX
53131 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53134 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
53140 \begin_inset Newline newline
53144 \begin_inset Flex URL
53147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53149 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
53157 \begin_layout Bibliography
53158 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53159 LatexCommand bibitem
53160 key "latexcompanion"
53165 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
53167 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
53168 Companion Second Edition.
53171 Addison-Wesley, 2004
53174 \begin_layout Bibliography
53175 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53176 LatexCommand bibitem
53182 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
53185 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
53189 Addison-Wesley, 2003
53192 \begin_layout Bibliography
53193 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53194 LatexCommand bibitem
53203 : A Document Preparation System.
53206 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
53209 \begin_layout Bibliography
53210 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53211 LatexCommand bibitem
53221 The \SpecialChar TeX
53225 Addison-Wesley, 1984
53228 \begin_layout Bibliography
53229 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53230 LatexCommand bibitem
53236 The \SpecialChar TeX
53238 \begin_inset Newline newline
53242 \begin_inset Flex URL
53245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53247 https://ctan.org/topic
53255 \begin_layout Bibliography
53256 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53257 LatexCommand bibitem
53263 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
53265 \begin_inset Newline newline
53269 \begin_inset Flex URL
53272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53274 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
53282 \begin_layout Bibliography
53283 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53284 LatexCommand bibitem
53291 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53293 name "Documentation"
53294 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
53301 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
53305 \begin_inset Newline newline
53309 \begin_inset Flex URL
53312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53314 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
53322 \begin_layout Bibliography
53323 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53324 LatexCommand bibitem
53331 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53333 name "Documentation"
53334 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
53339 how to use the program
53341 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
53345 \begin_inset Newline newline
53349 \begin_inset Flex URL
53352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53354 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
53362 \begin_layout Bibliography
53363 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53364 LatexCommand bibitem
53371 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53373 name "Documentation"
53374 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
53379 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53385 \begin_inset Index idx
53388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53390 packages ! biblatex
53396 \begin_inset Newline newline
53400 \begin_inset Flex URL
53403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53405 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
53413 \begin_layout Bibliography
53414 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53415 LatexCommand bibitem
53422 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53424 name "Documentation"
53425 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
53430 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53436 \begin_inset Index idx
53439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53447 \begin_inset Newline newline
53451 \begin_inset Flex URL
53454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53456 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
53464 \begin_layout Bibliography
53465 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53466 LatexCommand bibitem
53473 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53475 name "Documentation"
53476 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
53486 \begin_inset Newline newline
53490 \begin_inset Flex URL
53493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53495 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
53503 \begin_layout Bibliography
53504 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53505 LatexCommand bibitem
53506 key "makeindex-man"
53512 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53515 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
53525 \begin_inset Newline newline
53529 \begin_inset Flex URL
53532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53534 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
53542 \begin_layout Bibliography
53543 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53544 LatexCommand bibitem
53551 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53553 name "Documentation"
53554 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
53564 \begin_inset Newline newline
53568 \begin_inset Flex URL
53571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53573 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
53581 \begin_layout Bibliography
53582 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53583 LatexCommand bibitem
53590 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53592 name "Documentation"
53593 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
53598 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
53600 \begin_inset Newline newline
53604 \begin_inset Flex URL
53607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53609 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
53617 \begin_layout Bibliography
53618 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53619 LatexCommand bibitem
53626 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53628 name "Documentation"
53629 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
53634 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53640 \begin_inset Index idx
53643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53651 \begin_inset Newline newline
53655 \begin_inset Flex URL
53658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53660 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
53668 \begin_layout Bibliography
53669 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53670 LatexCommand bibitem
53677 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53679 name "Documentation"
53680 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
53685 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53691 \begin_inset Index idx
53694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53696 packages ! enumitem
53702 \begin_inset Newline newline
53706 \begin_inset Flex URL
53709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53711 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
53719 \begin_layout Bibliography
53720 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53721 LatexCommand bibitem
53728 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53730 name "Documentation"
53731 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
53736 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53742 \begin_inset Index idx
53745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53747 packages ! fancyhdr
53753 \begin_inset Newline newline
53757 \begin_inset Flex URL
53760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53762 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
53770 \begin_layout Bibliography
53771 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53772 LatexCommand bibitem
53779 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53781 name "Documentation"
53782 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
53787 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53793 \begin_inset Index idx
53796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53798 packages ! hyperref
53804 \begin_inset Newline newline
53808 \begin_inset Flex URL
53811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53813 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
53821 \begin_layout Bibliography
53822 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53823 LatexCommand bibitem
53830 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53832 name "Documentation"
53833 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
53838 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53844 \begin_inset Index idx
53847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53849 packages ! microtype
53855 \begin_inset Newline newline
53859 \begin_inset Flex URL
53862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53864 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
53872 \begin_layout Bibliography
53873 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53874 LatexCommand bibitem
53881 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53883 name "Documentation"
53884 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
53889 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53895 \begin_inset Index idx
53898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53906 \begin_inset Newline newline
53910 \begin_inset Flex URL
53913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53915 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
53923 \begin_layout Bibliography
53924 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53925 LatexCommand bibitem
53932 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53934 name "Documentation"
53935 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
53940 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53946 \begin_inset Index idx
53949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53951 packages ! prettyref
53957 \begin_inset Newline newline
53961 \begin_inset Flex URL
53964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53966 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
53974 \begin_layout Bibliography
53975 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53976 LatexCommand bibitem
53983 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53985 name "Documentation"
53986 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
53991 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53997 \begin_inset Index idx
54000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54002 packages ! refstyle
54008 \begin_inset Newline newline
54012 \begin_inset Flex URL
54015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54017 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
54025 \begin_layout Bibliography
54026 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54027 LatexCommand bibitem
54034 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54037 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
54042 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54044 \begin_inset Newline newline
54048 \begin_inset Flex URL
54051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54053 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
54061 \begin_layout Bibliography
54062 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54063 LatexCommand bibitem
54070 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54073 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
54078 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54080 \begin_inset Newline newline
54084 \begin_inset Flex URL
54087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54089 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
54097 \begin_layout Bibliography
54098 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54099 LatexCommand bibitem
54106 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54109 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
54114 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54115 for Cyrillic languages:
54116 \begin_inset Newline newline
54120 \begin_inset Flex URL
54123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54125 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
54133 \begin_layout Bibliography
54134 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54135 LatexCommand bibitem
54142 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54145 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
54150 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54152 \begin_inset Newline newline
54156 \begin_inset Flex URL
54159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54161 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
54169 \begin_layout Bibliography
54170 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54171 LatexCommand bibitem
54178 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54181 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
54186 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54188 \begin_inset Newline newline
54192 \begin_inset Flex URL
54195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54197 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
54205 \begin_layout Bibliography
54206 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54207 LatexCommand bibitem
54214 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54217 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
54222 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54224 \begin_inset Newline newline
54228 \begin_inset Flex URL
54231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54233 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
54241 \begin_layout Standard
54242 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
54249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54276 \begin_inset Note Note
54279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54286 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
54287 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
54288 bibliography is the second one:
54296 \begin_layout Standard
54297 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
54298 LatexCommand bibtex
54299 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
54300 options "biblio/alphadin"
54307 \begin_layout Standard
54308 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
54312 \begin_layout Standard
54316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54322 pagedeclaration}[1]{
54325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54331 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
54339 \begin_inset Note Note
54342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54343 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
54344 \begin_inset space ~
54348 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54350 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
54362 \begin_layout Standard
54363 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
54364 LatexCommand printnomenclature
54370 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
54371 LatexCommand printindex